From cf7ed063304873b3b09c81e31ac99f161f46211d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Christian Lohmaier Date: Mon, 25 Jan 2016 10:24:09 +0100 Subject: remove multiple spaces (and save with helpauthoring extension) Change-Id: Ic5d12de95d9265ed411ddc8e56f1db3e150765bf --- source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp | 1424 ++++++------ source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp | 2410 ++++++++++---------- source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp | 2197 +++++++++--------- source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp | 978 ++++---- source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp | 1346 +++++------ source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp | 75 +- source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp | 97 +- source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp | 106 +- source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp | 138 +- source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp | 132 +- source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp | 98 +- source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp | 780 +++---- source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp | 5 +- source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp | 157 +- source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp | 181 +- source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp | 73 +- source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp | 86 +- source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp | 112 +- source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp | 11 +- source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp | 118 +- source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp | 134 +- source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp | 186 +- source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp | 97 +- source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp | 67 +- source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp | 167 +- source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp | 73 +- source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp | 78 +- source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp | 413 ++-- source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp | 89 +- source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp | 183 +- source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp | 118 +- source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp | 280 ++- source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp | 99 +- source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp | 154 +- source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp | 156 +- source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp | 96 +- source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp | 92 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp | 92 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp | 104 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp | 209 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp | 124 +- source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp | 150 +- source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp | 106 +- source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp | 115 +- source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp | 222 +- source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp | 212 +- source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp | 189 +- source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp | 92 +- source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp | 222 +- source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp | 71 +- source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp | 152 +- source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp | 71 +- source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp | 94 +- source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp | 135 +- .../guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp | 82 +- source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp | 92 +- source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp | 71 +- source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp | 94 +- source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp | 87 +- source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp | 93 +- source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp | 13 +- source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp | 148 +- 62 files changed, 8013 insertions(+), 8033 deletions(-) diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp index 52316209cb..b7120c4c0d 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> - -Information Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp - + + Information Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060104.xhp + + -information functions -Function Wizard; information -functions; information functions + + + information functions + Function Wizard; information + functions; information functions -Information Functions -This category contains the Information functions. - + + +Information Functions +This category contains the Information functions. +
-The data in the following table serves as the basis for some of the examples in the function descriptions: +The data in the following table serves as the basis for some of the examples in the function descriptions: + - - - - -C - - -D - - - - - -2 - - - -x value - - - -y value - - - - - - -3 - - - - --5 - - - - --3 - - - - - - -4 - - - - --2 - - - - -0 - - - - - - -5 - - - - --1 - - - - -1 - - - - - - -6 - - - - -0 - - - - -3 - - - - - - -7 - - - - -2 - - - - -4 - - - - - - -8 - - - - -4 - - - - -6 - - - - - - -9 - - - - -6 - - - - -8 - - - + + + + + C + + + D + + + + + 2 + + + x value + + + y value + + + + + 3 + + + -5 + + + -3 + + + + + 4 + + + -2 + + + 0 + + + + + 5 + + + -1 + + + 1 + + + + + 6 + + + 0 + + + 3 + + + + + 7 + + + 2 + + + 4 + + + + + 8 + + + 4 + + + 6 + + + + + 9 + + + 6 + + + 8 + +
+
-INFO function + + INFO function + -INFO -Returns specific information about the current working environment. The function receives a single text argument and returns data depending on that parameter. -Syntax -INFO("Type") -The following table lists the values for the text parameter Type and the return values of the INFO function. + +INFO +Returns specific information about the current working environment. The function receives a single text argument and returns data depending on that parameter. + +Syntax +INFO("Type") +The following table lists the values for the text parameter Type and the return values of the INFO function. + - - -Value for "Type"Do not translate the text values in this column below - - -Return value - - - - -"osversion" - - -Always "Windows (32-bit) NT 5.01", for compatibility reasons - - - - -"system" - - -The type of the operating system.
"WNT" for Microsoft Windows
"LINUX" for Linux
"SOLARIS" for Solaris - - - - -"release" - - -The product release identifier, for example "300m25(Build:9876)" - - - - -"numfile" - - -Always 1, for compatibility reasons - - - - -"recalc" - - -Current formula recalculation mode, either "Automatic" or "Manual" (localized into %PRODUCTNAME language) - - + + + Value for "Type"Do not translate the text values in this column below + + + Return value + + + + + "osversion" + + + Always "Windows (32-bit) NT 5.01", for compatibility reasons + + + + + "system" + + + The type of the operating system.
"WNT" for Microsoft Windows
"LINUX" for Linux
"SOLARIS" for Solaris + + + + + "release" + + + The product release identifier, for example "300m25(Build:9876)" + + + + + "numfile" + + + Always 1, for compatibility reasons + + + + + "recalc" + + + Current formula recalculation mode, either "Automatic" or "Manual" (localized into %PRODUCTNAME language) + +
-Other spreadsheet applications may accept localized values for the Type parameter, but %PRODUCTNAME Calc will only accept the English values. -Example - -=INFO("release") returns the product release number of the %PRODUCTNAME in use.Do not translate "release" - -=INFO(D5) with cell D5 containing a text string system returns the operation system type.Do not translate the hlp_literal system +Other spreadsheet applications may accept localized values for the Type parameter, but %PRODUCTNAME Calc will only accept the English values. + +Example +=INFO("release") returns the product release number of the %PRODUCTNAME in use.Do not translate "release" +=INFO(D5) with cell D5 containing a text string system returns the operation system type.Do not translate the hlp_literal system
+
-CURRENT function + + CURRENT function + -CURRENT -This function returns the result to date of evaluating the formula of which it is a part (in other words the result as far as that evaluation has got). Its main use is together with the STYLE() function to apply selected styles to a cell depending on the cell contents. -Syntax -CURRENT() -Example - -=1+2+CURRENT() - -The example returns 6. The formula is calculated from left to right as: 1 + 2 equals 3, giving the result to date when CURRENT() is encountered; CURRENT() therefore yields 3, which is added to the original 3 to give 6. - -=A2+B2+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>10;”Red”;”Default”)) - -The example returns A2 + B2 (STYLE returns 0 here). If this sum is greater than 10, the style Red is applied to the cell. See the STYLE function for more explanation. - -="choo"&CURRENT() - -The example returns choochoo. + +CURRENT +This function returns the result to date of evaluating the formula of which it is a part (in other words the result as far as that evaluation has got). Its main use is together with the STYLE() function to apply selected styles to a cell depending on the cell contents. + +Syntax +CURRENT() + +Example +=1+2+CURRENT() +The example returns 6. The formula is calculated from left to right as: 1 + 2 equals 3, giving the result to date when CURRENT() is encountered; CURRENT() therefore yields 3, which is added to the original 3 to give 6. +=A2+B2+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>10;”Red”;”Default”)) +The example returns A2 + B2 (STYLE returns 0 here). If this sum is greater than 10, the style Red is applied to the cell. See the STYLE function for more explanation. +="choo"&CURRENT() +The example returns choochoo.
+
-FORMULA function -formula cells;displaying formulas in other cells -displaying;formulas at any position -mw added "formula cells;" and "displaying;" + + FORMULA function + formula cells;displaying formulas in other cells + displaying;formulas at any position + +mw added "formula cells;" and "displaying;" -FORMULA -Displays the formula of a formula cell as a text string. -Syntax -FORMULA(Reference) - -Reference is a reference to a cell containing a formula. -An invalid reference or a reference to a cell with no formula results in the error value #N/A. -Example -If cell A8 contains the formula =SUM(1;2;3) then - -=FORMULA(A8) returns the text =SUM(1;2;3). + +FORMULA +Displays the formula of a formula cell as a text string. + +Syntax +FORMULA(Reference) +Reference is a reference to a cell containing a formula. +An invalid reference or a reference to a cell with no formula results in the error value #N/A. + +Example +If cell A8 contains the formula =SUM(1;2;3) then +=FORMULA(A8) returns the text =SUM(1;2;3).
+
-ISREF function -references;testing cell contents -cell contents;testing for references -mw added "references;" and "cell contents;" + + ISREF function + references;testing cell contents + cell contents;testing for references + +mw added "references;" and "cell contents;" -ISREF -Tests if the argument is a reference. Returns TRUE if the argument is a reference, returns FALSE otherwise. When given a reference this function does not examine the value being referenced.i82565 + +ISREF +Tests if the argument is a reference. Returns TRUE if the argument is a reference, returns FALSE otherwise. When given a reference this function does not examine the value being referenced.i82565 -Syntax -ISREF(Value) - -Value is the value to be tested, to determine whether it is a reference. -Example - -=ISREF(C5) returns the result TRUE because C5 is a valid reference. - -=ISREF("abcdef") returns always FALSE because a text can never be a reference. - -=ISREF(4) returns FALSE. - -=ISREF(INDIRECT("A6")) returns TRUE, because INDIRECT is a function that returns a reference. - -=ISREF(ADDRESS(1; 1; 2;"Sheet2")) returns FALSE, because ADDRESS is a function that returns a text, although it looks like a reference. + +Syntax +ISREF(Value) +Value is the value to be tested, to determine whether it is a reference. + +Example +=ISREF(C5) returns the result TRUE because C5 is a valid reference. +=ISREF("abcdef") returns always FALSE because a text can never be a reference. +=ISREF(4) returns FALSE. +=ISREF(INDIRECT("A6")) returns TRUE, because INDIRECT is a function that returns a reference. +=ISREF(ADDRESS(1; 1; 2;"Sheet2")) returns FALSE, because ADDRESS is a function that returns a text, although it looks like a reference.
+
-ISERR function -error codes;controlling -mw added "error codes," + + ISERR function + error codes;controlling + +mw added "error codes," -ISERR -Tests for error conditions, except the #N/A error value, and returns TRUE or FALSE. + +ISERR +Tests for error conditions, except the #N/A error value, and returns TRUE or FALSE. -Syntax -ISERR(Value) - -Value is any value or expression which is tested to see whether an error value other than #N/A is present. -Example - -=ISERR(C8) where cell C8 contains =1/0 returns TRUE, because 1/0 is an error. - -=ISERR(C9) where cell C9 contains =NA() returns FALSE, because ISERR() ignores the #N/A error. + +Syntax +ISERR(Value) +Value is any value or expression which is tested to see whether an error value other than #N/A is present. + +Example +=ISERR(C8) where cell C8 contains =1/0 returns TRUE, because 1/0 is an error. +=ISERR(C9) where cell C9 contains =NA() returns FALSE, because ISERR() ignores the #N/A error.
+
-ISERROR function -recognizing;general errors -mw added "recognizing;" + + ISERROR function + recognizing;general errors + +mw added "recognizing;" -ISERROR -Tests for error conditions, including the #N/A error value, and returns TRUE or FALSE. + +ISERROR +Tests for error conditions, including the #N/A error value, and returns TRUE or FALSE. -Syntax -ISERROR(Value) - -Value is or refers to the value to be tested. ISERROR() returns TRUE if there is an error and FALSE if not. -Example - -=ISERROR(C8) where cell C8 contains =1/0 returns TRUE, because 1/0 is an error. - -=ISERROR(C9) where cell C9 contains =NA() returns TRUE. + +Syntax +ISERROR(Value) +Value is or refers to the value to be tested. ISERROR() returns TRUE if there is an error and FALSE if not. + +Example +=ISERROR(C8) where cell C8 contains =1/0 returns TRUE, because 1/0 is an error. +=ISERROR(C9) where cell C9 contains =NA() returns TRUE.
+
-IFERROR function -testing;general errors + + IFERROR function + testing;general errors + -IFERROR -Returns the value if the cell does not contains an error value, or the alternative value if it does. -Syntax -IFERROR(Value;Alternate_value) - -Value is the value or expression to be returned if it is not equal or results in an error. - -Alternate_value is the value or expression to be returned if the expression or value of Value is equal or results in an error. -Example - -=IFERROR(C8;C9) where cell C8 contains =1/0 returns the value of C9, because 1/0 is an error. - -=IFERROR(C8;C9) where cell C8 contains 13 returns 13, the value of C8, which is not an error. + +IFERROR +Returns the value if the cell does not contains an error value, or the alternative value if it does. + +Syntax +IFERROR(Value;Alternate_value) +Value is the value or expression to be returned if it is not equal or results in an error. +Alternate_value is the value or expression to be returned if the expression or value of Value is equal or results in an error. + +Example +=IFERROR(C8;C9) where cell C8 contains =1/0 returns the value of C9, because 1/0 is an error. +=IFERROR(C8;C9) where cell C8 contains 13 returns 13, the value of C8, which is not an error.
+
-ISFORMULA function -recognizing formula cells -formula cells;recognizing -mw inserted "recognizing..." and "formula cells;" + + ISFORMULA function + recognizing formula cells + formula cells;recognizing + +mw inserted "recognizing..." and "formula cells;" -ISFORMULA -Returns TRUE if a cell is a formula cell. + +ISFORMULA +Returns TRUE if a cell is a formula cell. -Syntax -ISFORMULA(Reference) - -Reference indicates the reference to a cell in which a test will be performed to determine if it contains a formula. -Example - -=ISFORMULA(C4) returns FALSE if the cell C4 contains the number 5. + +Syntax +ISFORMULA(Reference) +Reference indicates the reference to a cell in which a test will be performed to determine if it contains a formula. + +Example +=ISFORMULA(C4) returns FALSE if the cell C4 contains the number 5.
+
-ISEVEN function -even integers + + ISEVEN function + even integers + -ISEVEN -Returns TRUE if the value is an even integer, or FALSE if the value is odd. -Syntax -ISEVEN(Value) -Value is the value to be checked. -If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. -Example - -=ISEVEN(48) returns TRUE - -=ISEVEN(33) returns FALSE - -=ISEVEN(0) returns TRUE - -=ISEVEN(-2.1) returns TRUE - -=ISEVEN(3.999) returns FALSEsee also ISODD + +ISEVEN +Returns TRUE if the value is an even integer, or FALSE if the value is odd. + +Syntax +ISEVEN(Value) +Value is the value to be checked. +If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. + +Example +=ISEVEN(48) returns TRUE +=ISEVEN(33) returns FALSE +=ISEVEN(0) returns TRUE +=ISEVEN(-2.1) returns TRUE +=ISEVEN(3.999) returns FALSEsee also ISODD
+
-ISEVEN_ADD function + + ISEVEN_ADD function + -ISEVEN_ADD -Tests for even numbers. Returns 1 if the number divided by 2 returns a whole number. + +ISEVEN_ADD +Tests for even numbers. Returns 1 if the number divided by 2 returns a whole number. -Syntax -ISEVEN_ADD(Number) - -Number is the number to be tested. -Example - -=ISEVEN_ADD(5) returns 0. - -=ISEVEN_ADD(A1) returns 1 if cell A1 contains the number 2. + +Syntax +ISEVEN_ADD(Number) +Number is the number to be tested. + +Example +=ISEVEN_ADD(5) returns 0. +=ISEVEN_ADD(A1) returns 1 if cell A1 contains the number 2.
+
-ISNONTEXT function -cell contents;no text -mw added "cell contents;" + + ISNONTEXT function + cell contents;no text + +mw added "cell contents;" -ISNONTEXT -Tests if the cell contents are text or numbers, and returns FALSE if the contents are text. -If an error occurs, the function returns TRUE. -Syntax -ISNONTEXT(Value) - -Value is any value or expression where a test is performed to determine whether it is a text or numbers or a Boolean value. -Example - -=ISNONTEXT(D2) returns FALSE if cell D2 contains the text abcdef. - -=ISNONTEXT(D9) returns TRUE if cell D9 contains the number 8. + +ISNONTEXT +Tests if the cell contents are text or numbers, and returns FALSE if the contents are text. +If an error occurs, the function returns TRUE. + +Syntax +ISNONTEXT(Value) +Value is any value or expression where a test is performed to determine whether it is a text or numbers or a Boolean value. + +Example +=ISNONTEXT(D2) returns FALSE if cell D2 contains the text abcdef. +=ISNONTEXT(D9) returns TRUE if cell D9 contains the number 8.
+
-ISBLANK function -blank cell contents -empty cells; recognizing -mw added "blank..." and "empty cells;" + + ISBLANK function + blank cell contents + empty cells; recognizing + +mw added "blank..." and "empty cells;" -ISBLANK -Returns TRUE if the reference to a cell is blank. This function is used to determine if the content of a cell is empty. A cell with a formula inside is not empty. + +ISBLANK +Returns TRUE if the reference to a cell is blank. This function is used to determine if the content of a cell is empty. A cell with a formula inside is not empty. -Syntax -ISBLANK(Value) - -Value is the content to be tested. -Example - -=ISBLANK(D2) returns FALSE as a result. + +Syntax +ISBLANK(Value) +Value is the content to be tested. + +Example +=ISBLANK(D2) returns FALSE as a result.
+
-ISLOGICAL function -number formats;logical -logical number formats -mw added "number formats;" and "logical..." + + ISLOGICAL function + number formats;logical + logical number formats + +mw added "number formats;" and "logical..." -ISLOGICAL -Tests for a logical value (TRUE or FALSE). -If an error occurs, the function returns FALSE. -Syntax -ISLOGICAL(Value) -Returns TRUE if Value is a logical value (TRUE or FALSE), and returns FALSE otherwise. -Example - -=ISLOGICAL(99) returns FALSE, because 99 is a number, not a logical value. - -=ISLOGICAL(ISNA(D4)) returns TRUE whatever the contents of cell D4, because ISNA() returns a logical value. + +ISLOGICAL +Tests for a logical value (TRUE or FALSE). +If an error occurs, the function returns FALSE. + +Syntax +ISLOGICAL(Value) +Returns TRUE if Value is a logical value (TRUE or FALSE), and returns FALSE otherwise. + +Example +=ISLOGICAL(99) returns FALSE, because 99 is a number, not a logical value. +=ISLOGICAL(ISNA(D4)) returns TRUE whatever the contents of cell D4, because ISNA() returns a logical value.
+
-ISNA function -#N/A error;recognizing -mw added "#N/A ..." + + ISNA function + #N/A error;recognizing + +mw added "#N/A ..." -ISNA -Returns TRUE if a cell contains the #N/A (value not available) error value. -If an error occurs, the function returns FALSE. -Syntax -ISNA(Value) - -Value is the value or expression to be tested. -Example - -=ISNA(D3) returns FALSE as a result. + +ISNA +Returns TRUE if a cell contains the #N/A (value not available) error value. +If an error occurs, the function returns FALSE. + +Syntax +ISNA(Value) +Value is the value or expression to be tested. + +Example +=ISNA(D3) returns FALSE as a result.
+
-IFNA function -#N/A error;testing + + IFNA function + #N/A error;testing + -IFNA -Returns the value if the cell does not contains the #N/A (value not available) error value, or the alternative value if it does. -Syntax -IFNA(Value;Alternate_value) - -Value is the value or expression to be returned if it is not equal or results in an #N/A error. - -Alternate_value is the value or expression to be returned if the expression or value of Value is equal or results in an #N/A error. -Example - -=IFNA(D3;D4) returns the value of D3 if D3 does not result in an #N/A error, or D4 if it does. + +IFNA +Returns the value if the cell does not contains the #N/A (value not available) error value, or the alternative value if it does. + +Syntax +IFNA(Value;Alternate_value) +Value is the value or expression to be returned if it is not equal or results in an #N/A error. +Alternate_value is the value or expression to be returned if the expression or value of Value is equal or results in an #N/A error. + +Example +=IFNA(D3;D4) returns the value of D3 if D3 does not result in an #N/A error, or D4 if it does.
+
-ISTEXT function -cell contents;text + + ISTEXT function + cell contents;text + -ISTEXT -Returns TRUE if the cell contents refer to text. -If an error occurs, the function returns FALSE. -Syntax -ISTEXT(Value) - -Value is a value, number, Boolean value, or an error value to be tested. -Example - -=ISTEXT(D9) returns TRUE if cell D9 contains the text abcdef. - -=ISTEXT(C3) returns FALSE if cell C3 contains the number 3. + +ISTEXT +Returns TRUE if the cell contents refer to text. +If an error occurs, the function returns FALSE. + +Syntax +ISTEXT(Value) +Value is a value, number, Boolean value, or an error value to be tested. + +Example +=ISTEXT(D9) returns TRUE if cell D9 contains the text abcdef. +=ISTEXT(C3) returns FALSE if cell C3 contains the number 3.
+
-ISODD function -odd integers + + ISODD function + odd integers + -ISODD -Returns TRUE if the value is odd, or FALSE if the number is even. -Syntax -ISODD(value) -Value is the value to be checked. -If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. -Example - -=ISODD(33) returns TRUE - -=ISODD(48) returns FALSE - -=ISODD(3.999) returns TRUE - -=ISODD(-3.1) returns TRUEsee also ISEVEN + +ISODD +Returns TRUE if the value is odd, or FALSE if the number is even. + +Syntax +ISODD(value) +Value is the value to be checked. +If Value is not an integer any digits after the decimal point are ignored. The sign of Value is also ignored. + +Example +=ISODD(33) returns TRUE +=ISODD(48) returns FALSE +=ISODD(3.999) returns TRUE +=ISODD(-3.1) returns TRUEsee also ISEVEN
+
-ISODD_ADD function + + ISODD_ADD function + -ISODD_ADD -Returns TRUE (1) if the number does not return a whole number when divided by 2. + +ISODD_ADD +Returns TRUE (1) if the number does not return a whole number when divided by 2. -Syntax -ISODD_ADD(Number) - -Number is the number to be tested. -Example - -=ISODD_ADD(5) returns 1. + +Syntax +ISODD_ADD(Number) +Number is the number to be tested. + +Example +=ISODD_ADD(5) returns 1.
+
-ISNUMBER function -cell contents;numbers -mw added "cell contents;" + + ISNUMBER function + cell contents;numbers + +mw added "cell contents;" -ISNUMBER -Returns TRUE if the value refers to a number. + +ISNUMBER +Returns TRUE if the value refers to a number. -Syntax -ISNUMBER(Value) - -Value is any expression to be tested to determine whether it is a number or text. -Example - -=ISNUMBER(C3) returns TRUE if the cell C3 contains the number 4. - -=ISNUMBER(C2) returns FALSE if the cell C2 contains the text abcdef. + +Syntax +ISNUMBER(Value) +Value is any expression to be tested to determine whether it is a number or text. + +Example +=ISNUMBER(C3) returns TRUE if the cell C3 contains the number 4. +=ISNUMBER(C2) returns FALSE if the cell C2 contains the text abcdef.
+
-N function + + N function + -N -Returns the numeric value of the given parameter. Returns 0 if parameter is text or FALSE. -If an error occurs the function returns the error value. -Syntax -N(Value) - -Value is the parameter to be converted into a number. N() returns the numeric value if it can. It returns the logical values TRUE and FALSE as 1 and 0 respectively. It returns text as 0. -Example - -=N(123) returns 123 - -=N(TRUE) returns 1 - -=N(FALSE) returns 0 - -=N("abc") returns 0 -=N(1/0) returns #DIV/0! + +N +Returns the numeric value of the given parameter. Returns 0 if parameter is text or FALSE. +If an error occurs the function returns the error value. + +Syntax +N(Value) +Value is the parameter to be converted into a number. N() returns the numeric value if it can. It returns the logical values TRUE and FALSE as 1 and 0 respectively. It returns text as 0. + +Example +=N(123) returns 123 +=N(TRUE) returns 1 +=N(FALSE) returns 0 +=N("abc") returns 0 +=N(1/0) returns #DIV/0!
+
-NA function -#N/A error;assigning to a cell -mw added "#N/A error;" + + NA function + #N/A error;assigning to a cell + +mw added "#N/A error;" -NA -Returns the error value #N/A. -Syntax -NA() -Example - -=NA() converts the contents of the cell into #N/A. + +NA +Returns the error value #N/A. + +Syntax +NA() + +Example +=NA() converts the contents of the cell into #N/A.
+
-TYPE function + + TYPE function + -TYPE -Returns the type of value, where 1 = number, 2 = text, 4 = Boolean value, 8 = formula, 16 = error value, 64 = array. + +TYPE +Returns the type of value, where 1 = number, 2 = text, 4 = Boolean value, 8 = formula, 16 = error value, 64 = array. -Syntax -TYPE(Value) - -Value is a specific value for which the data type is determined. -Example (see example table above) - -=TYPE(C2) returns 2 as a result. - -=TYPE(D9) returns 1 as a result. + +Syntax +TYPE(Value) +Value is a specific value for which the data type is determined. + +Example (see example table above) +=TYPE(C2) returns 2 as a result. +=TYPE(D9) returns 1 as a result.
+
-CELL function -cell information -information on cells -mw added two entries + + CELL function + cell information + information on cells + +mw added two entries -CELL -Returns information on address, formatting or contents of a cell. -Syntax -CELL("InfoType"; Reference) - -InfoType is the character string that specifies the type of information. The character string is always in English. Upper or lower case is optional. + +CELL +Returns information on address, formatting or contents of a cell. + +Syntax +CELL("InfoType"; Reference) +InfoType is the character string that specifies the type of information. The character string is always in English. Upper or lower case is optional. + - - -InfoType - - -Meaning - - - - -COL - - -Returns the number of the referenced column. - -=CELL("COL";D2) returns 4. - - - - -ROW - - -Returns the number of the referenced row. - -=CELL("ROW";D2) returns 2. - - - - -SHEET - - -Returns the number of the referenced sheet. - -=CELL("Sheet";Sheet3.D2) returns 3. - - - - -ADDRESS - - -Returns the absolute address of the referenced cell. - -=CELL("ADDRESS";D2) returns $D$2. - -=CELL("ADDRESS";Sheet3.D2) returns $Sheet3.$D$2. - -=CELL("ADDRESS";'X:\dr\test.sxc'#$Sheet1.D2) returns 'file:///X:/dr/test.sxc'#$Sheet1.$D$2. - - - - -FILENAME - - -Returns the file name and the sheet number of the referenced cell. - -=CELL("FILENAME";D2) returns 'file:///X:/dr/own.sxc'#$Sheet1, if the formula in the current document X:\dr\own.sxc is located in Sheet1. - -=CELL("FILENAME";'X:\dr\test.sxc'#$Sheet1.D2) returns 'file:///X:/dr/test.sxc'#$Sheet1. - - - - -COORD - - -Returns the complete cell address in Lotus(TM) notation. - -=CELL("COORD"; D2) returns $A:$D$2. - -=CELL("COORD"; Sheet3.D2) returns $C:$D$2. - - - - -CONTENTS - - -Returns the contents of the referenced cell, without any formatting. - - - - -TYPE - - -Returns the type of cell contents. -b = blank. empty cell -l = label. Text, result of a formula as text -v = value. Value, result of a formula as a number - - - - -WIDTH - - -Returns the width of the referenced column. The unit is the number of zeros (0) that fit into the column in the default text and the default size. - - - - -PREFIX - - -Returns the alignment of the referenced cell. -' = align left or left-justified -" = align right -^ = centered -\ = repeating (currently inactive) - - - - -PROTECT - - -Returns the status of the cell protection for the cell. -1 = cell is protected -0 = cell is not protected - - - - -FORMAT - - -Returns a character string that indicates the number format. -, = number with thousands separator -F = number without thousands separator -C = currency format -S = exponential representation, for example, 1.234+E56 -P = percentage -In the above formats, the number of decimal places after the decimal separator is given as a number. Example: the number format #,##0.0 returns ,1 and the number format 00.000% returns P3 -D1 = MMM-D-YY, MM-D-YY and similar formats -D2 = DD-MM -D3 = MM-YY -D4 = DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS -D5 = MM-DD -D6 = HH:MM:SS AM/PM -D7 = HH:MM AM/PM -D8 = HH:MM:SS -D9 = HH:MM -G = All other formats -- (Minus) at the end = negative numbers are formatted in color -() (brackets) at the end = there is an opening bracket in the format code - - - - -COLOR - - -Returns 1, if negative values have been formatted in color, otherwise 0. - - - - -PARENTHESES - - -Returns 1 if the format code contains an opening bracket (, otherwise 0. - - + + + InfoType + + + Meaning + + + + + COL + + + Returns the number of the referenced column. + =CELL("COL";D2) returns 4. + + + + + ROW + + + Returns the number of the referenced row. + =CELL("ROW";D2) returns 2. + + + + + SHEET + + + Returns the number of the referenced sheet. + =CELL("Sheet";Sheet3.D2) returns 3. + + + + + ADDRESS + + + Returns the absolute address of the referenced cell. + =CELL("ADDRESS";D2) returns $D$2. + =CELL("ADDRESS";Sheet3.D2) returns $Sheet3.$D$2. + =CELL("ADDRESS";'X:\dr\test.sxc'#$Sheet1.D2) returns 'file:///X:/dr/test.sxc'#$Sheet1.$D$2. + + + + + FILENAME + + + Returns the file name and the sheet number of the referenced cell. + =CELL("FILENAME";D2) returns 'file:///X:/dr/own.sxc'#$Sheet1, if the formula in the current document X:\dr\own.sxc is located in Sheet1. + =CELL("FILENAME";'X:\dr\test.sxc'#$Sheet1.D2) returns 'file:///X:/dr/test.sxc'#$Sheet1. + + + + + COORD + + + Returns the complete cell address in Lotus(TM) notation. + =CELL("COORD"; D2) returns $A:$D$2. + =CELL("COORD"; Sheet3.D2) returns $C:$D$2. + + + + + CONTENTS + + + Returns the contents of the referenced cell, without any formatting. + + + + + TYPE + + + Returns the type of cell contents. + b = blank. empty cell + l = label. Text, result of a formula as text + v = value. Value, result of a formula as a number + + + + + WIDTH + + + Returns the width of the referenced column. The unit is the number of zeros (0) that fit into the column in the default text and the default size. + + + + + PREFIX + + + Returns the alignment of the referenced cell. + ' = align left or left-justified + " = align right + ^ = centered + \ = repeating (currently inactive) + + + + + PROTECT + + + Returns the status of the cell protection for the cell. + 1 = cell is protected + 0 = cell is not protected + + + + + FORMAT + + + Returns a character string that indicates the number format. + , = number with thousands separator + F = number without thousands separator + C = currency format + S = exponential representation, for example, 1.234+E56 + P = percentage + In the above formats, the number of decimal places after the decimal separator is given as a number. Example: the number format #,##0.0 returns ,1 and the number format 00.000% returns P3 + D1 = MMM-D-YY, MM-D-YY and similar formats + D2 = DD-MM + D3 = MM-YY + D4 = DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM:SS + D5 = MM-DD + D6 = HH:MM:SS AM/PM + D7 = HH:MM AM/PM + D8 = HH:MM:SS + D9 = HH:MM + G = All other formats + - (Minus) at the end = negative numbers are formatted in color + () (brackets) at the end = there is an opening bracket in the format code + + + + + COLOR + + + Returns 1, if negative values have been formatted in color, otherwise 0. + + + + + PARENTHESES + + + Returns 1 if the format code contains an opening bracket (, otherwise 0. + +
- -Reference (list of options) is the position of the cell to be examined. If Reference is a range, the cell moves to the top left of the range. If Reference is missing, $[officename] Calc uses the position of the cell in which this formula is located. Microsoft Excel uses the reference of the cell in which the cursor is positioned. +Reference (list of options) is the position of the cell to be examined. If Reference is a range, the cell moves to the top left of the range. If Reference is missing, $[officename] Calc uses the position of the cell in which this formula is located. Microsoft Excel uses the reference of the cell in which the cursor is positioned.
+
- + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp index fb526b3f4f..7860d0a023 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> + - -Mathematical Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp - + + Mathematical Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp + + -mathematical functions -Function Wizard; mathematical -functions; mathematical functions -trigonometric functions - -Mathematical Functions -This category contains the Mathematical functions for Calc. - To open the Function Wizard, choose Insert - Function. + + + mathematical functions + Function Wizard; mathematical + functions; mathematical functions + trigonometric functions + + + +Mathematical Functions +This category contains the Mathematical functions for Calc. To open the Function Wizard, choose Insert - Function. +
-ABS function -absolute values -values;absolute -mw added two entries + + ABS function + absolute values + values;absolute + +mw added two entries -ABS -Returns the absolute value of a number. -Syntax -ABS(Number) -Number is the number whose absolute value is to be calculated. The absolute value of a number is its value without the +/- sign. -Example - -=ABS(-56) returns 56. - -=ABS(12) returns 12. - -=ABS(0) returns 0.see also SIGN + +ABS +Returns the absolute value of a number. + +Syntax +ABS(Number) +Number is the number whose absolute value is to be calculated. The absolute value of a number is its value without the +/- sign. + +Example +=ABS(-56) returns 56. +=ABS(12) returns 12. +=ABS(0) returns 0.see also SIGN
+
-ACOS function + + ACOS function + -ACOS -Returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of a number. -Syntax -ACOS(Number) - This function returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cosine is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. -To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. -Example - -=ACOS(-1) returns 3.14159265358979 (PI radians) - -=DEGREES(ACOS(0.5)) returns 60. The cosine of 60 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +ACOS +Returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of a number. + +Syntax +ACOS(Number) +This function returns the inverse trigonometric cosine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cosine is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. + +Example +=ACOS(-1) returns 3.14159265358979 (PI radians) +=DEGREES(ACOS(0.5)) returns 60. The cosine of 60 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
+
-ACOSH function + + ACOSH function + -ACOSH -Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number. -Syntax -ACOSH(Number) - This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cosine is Number. - Number must be greater than or equal to 1. -Example - -=ACOSH(1) returns 0. - -=ACOSH(COSH(4)) returns 4.see also ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH + +ACOSH +Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number. + +Syntax +ACOSH(Number) +This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cosine is Number. +Number must be greater than or equal to 1. + +Example +=ACOSH(1) returns 0. +=ACOSH(COSH(4)) returns 4.see also ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH
+
-ACOT function + + ACOT function + -ACOT -Returns the inverse cotangent (the arccotangent) of the given number. -Syntax -ACOT(Number) - This function returns the inverse trigonometric cotangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cotangent is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. -To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. -Example - -=ACOT(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). - -=DEGREES(ACOT(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1. see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2 + +ACOT +Returns the inverse cotangent (the arccotangent) of the given number. + +Syntax +ACOT(Number) +This function returns the inverse trigonometric cotangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose cotangent is Number. The angle returned is between 0 and PI. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. + +Example +=ACOT(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). +=DEGREES(ACOT(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2
+
-ACOTH function + + ACOTH function + -ACOTH -Returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of the given number. -Syntax -ACOTH(Number) - This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cotangent is Number. -An error results if Number is between -1 and 1 inclusive. -Example - -=ACOTH(1.1) returns inverse hyperbolic cotangent of 1.1, approximately 1.52226.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH + +ACOTH +Returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of the given number. + +Syntax +ACOTH(Number) +This function returns the inverse hyperbolic cotangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic cotangent is Number. +An error results if Number is between -1 and 1 inclusive. + +Example +=ACOTH(1.1) returns inverse hyperbolic cotangent of 1.1, approximately 1.52226.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH
+
+
+
-ASIN function + + ASIN function + -ASIN -Returns the inverse trigonometric sine of a number. -Syntax -ASIN(Number) - This function returns the inverse trigonometric sine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose sine is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and +PI/2. -To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. -Example - -=ASIN(0) returns 0. - -=ASIN(1) returns 1.5707963267949 (PI/2 radians). - -=DEGREES(ASIN(0.5)) returns 30. The sine of 30 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +ASIN +Returns the inverse trigonometric sine of a number. + +Syntax +ASIN(Number) +This function returns the inverse trigonometric sine of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose sine is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and +PI/2. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. + +Example +=ASIN(0) returns 0. +=ASIN(1) returns 1.5707963267949 (PI/2 radians). +=DEGREES(ASIN(0.5)) returns 30. The sine of 30 degrees is 0.5.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
+
-ASINH function + + ASINH function + -ASINH -Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. -Syntax -ASINH(Number) - This function returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic sine is Number. -Example - -=ASINH(-90) returns approximately -5.1929877. - -=ASINH(SINH(4)) returns 4.see also ACOSH, ATANH, ACOTH, -COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH + +ASINH +Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. + +Syntax +ASINH(Number) +This function returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic sine is Number. + +Example +=ASINH(-90) returns approximately -5.1929877. +=ASINH(SINH(4)) returns 4.see also ACOSH, ATANH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH
+
-ATAN function + + ATAN function + -ATAN -Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of a number. -Syntax -ATAN(Number) - This function returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose tangent is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and PI/2. -To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. -Example - -=ATAN(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). - -=DEGREES(ATAN(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, -ACOS, ASIN, ATAN2, ACOT + +ATAN +Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of a number. + +Syntax +ATAN(Number) +This function returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of Number, that is the angle (in radians) whose tangent is Number. The angle returned is between -PI/2 and PI/2. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. + +Example +=ATAN(1) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). +=DEGREES(ATAN(1)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN2, ACOT
+
-ATAN2 function + + ATAN2 function + -ATAN2 -Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of the specified x and y coordinates. -Syntax -ATAN2(NumberX; NumberY) -NumberX is the value of the x coordinate. -NumberY is the value of the y coordinate. -ATAN2 returns the inverse trigonometric tangent, that is, the angle (in radians) between the x-axis and a line from point NumberX, NumberY to the origin. The angle returned is between -PI and PI. -To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. -Example - -=ATAN2(20;20) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). - -=DEGREES(ATAN2(12.3;12.3)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, -ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ACOT + +ATAN2 +Returns the inverse trigonometric tangent of the specified x and y coordinates. + +Syntax +ATAN2(NumberX; NumberY) +NumberX is the value of the x coordinate. +NumberY is the value of the y coordinate. +ATAN2 returns the inverse trigonometric tangent, that is, the angle (in radians) between the x-axis and a line from point NumberX, NumberY to the origin. The angle returned is between -PI and PI. +To return the angle in degrees, use the DEGREES function. + +Example +=ATAN2(20;20) returns 0.785398163397448 (PI/4 radians). +=DEGREES(ATAN2(12.3;12.3)) returns 45. The tangent of 45 degrees is 1.see also COS, SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ACOT
+
-ATANH function + + ATANH function + -ATANH -Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number. -Syntax -ATANH(Number) - This function returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic tangent is Number. - Number must obey the condition -1 < number < 1. -Example - -=ATANH(0) returns 0.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ACOTH, -COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH + +ATANH +Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number. + +Syntax +ATANH(Number) +This function returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of Number, that is the number whose hyperbolic tangent is Number. +Number must obey the condition -1 < number < 1. + +Example +=ATANH(0) returns 0.see also ACOSH, ASINH, ACOTH, COSH, SINH, TANH, COTH
+
-COS function + + COS function + -COS -Returns the cosine of the given angle (in radians). -Syntax -COS(Number) - Returns the (trigonometric) cosine of Number, the angle in radians. -To return the cosine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. -Examples - -=COS(PI()/2) returns 0, the cosine of PI/2 radians. - -=COS(RADIANS(60)) returns 0.5, the cosine of 60 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, -ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +COS +Returns the cosine of the given angle (in radians). + +Syntax +COS(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) cosine of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the cosine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + +Examples +=COS(PI()/2) returns 0, the cosine of PI/2 radians. +=COS(RADIANS(60)) returns 0.5, the cosine of 60 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
+
-COSH function + + COSH function + -COSH -Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number. -Syntax -COSH(Number) -Returns the hyperbolic cosine of Number. -Example - -=COSH(0) returns 1, the hyperbolic cosine of 0.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, -ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH, + +COSH +Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number. + +Syntax +COSH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic cosine of Number. + +Example +=COSH(0) returns 1, the hyperbolic cosine of 0.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH
+
-COT function + + COT function + -COT -Returns the cotangent of the given angle (in radians). -Syntax -COT(Number) - Returns the (trigonometric) cotangent of Number, the angle in radians. -To return the cotangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. -The cotangent of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the tangent of that angle. -Examples: - -=COT(PI()/4) returns 1, the cotangent of PI/4 radians. - -=COT(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the cotangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, TAN, -ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +COT +Returns the cotangent of the given angle (in radians). + +Syntax +COT(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) cotangent of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the cotangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. +The cotangent of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the tangent of that angle. + +Examples: +=COT(PI()/4) returns 1, the cotangent of PI/4 radians. +=COT(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the cotangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, TAN, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
+
-COTH function + + COTH function + -COTH -Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of a given number (angle). -Syntax -COTH(Number) - Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of Number. -Example - -=COTH(1) returns the hyperbolic cotangent of 1, approximately 1.3130.see also COSH, SINH, TANH, -ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH, + +COTH +Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of a given number (angle). + +Syntax +COTH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic cotangent of Number. + +Example +=COTH(1) returns the hyperbolic cotangent of 1, approximately 1.3130.see also COSH, SINH, TANH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH
+
-CSC function + + CSC function + -CSC -Returns the cosecant of the given angle (in radians). The cosecant of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the sine of that angle -Syntax -CSC(Number) - Returns the (trigonometric) cosecant of Number, the angle in radians. -To return the cosecant of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. -Examples - -=CSC(PI()/4) returns approximately 1.4142135624, the inverse of the sine of PI/4 radians. - -=CSC(RADIANS(30)) returns 2, the cosecant of 30 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, SEC, -ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +CSC +Returns the cosecant of the given angle (in radians). The cosecant of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the sine of that angle + +Syntax +CSC(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) cosecant of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the cosecant of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + +Examples +=CSC(PI()/4) returns approximately 1.4142135624, the inverse of the sine of PI/4 radians. +=CSC(RADIANS(30)) returns 2, the cosecant of 30 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, SEC, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
+
-CSCH function + + CSCH function + -CSCH -Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of a number. -Syntax -CSCH(Number) -Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of Number. -Example - -=CSCH(1) returns approximately 0.8509181282, the hyperbolic cosecant of 1.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, SECH,ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH, + +CSCH +Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of a number. + +Syntax +CSCH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic cosecant of Number. + +Example +=CSCH(1) returns approximately 0.8509181282, the hyperbolic cosecant of 1.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, SECH,ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH
+
-DEGREES function -converting;radians, into degrees -mw added one entry + + DEGREES function + converting;radians, into degrees + +mw added one entry -DEGREES -Converts radians into degrees. -Syntax -DEGREES(Number) -Number is the angle in radians to be converted to degrees. -Example - -=DEGREES(PI()) returns 180 degrees.see also RADIANS + +DEGREES +Converts radians into degrees. + +Syntax +DEGREES(Number) +Number is the angle in radians to be converted to degrees. + +Example +=DEGREES(PI()) returns 180 degrees.see also RADIANS
+
-EXP function + + EXP function + -EXP -Returns e raised to the power of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. -Syntax -EXP(Number) -Number is the power to which e is to be raised. -Example - -=EXP(1) returns 2.71828182845904, the mathematical constant e to Calc's accuracy.see also POWER, LN, + +EXP +Returns e raised to the power of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. + +Syntax +EXP(Number) +Number is the power to which e is to be raised. + +Example +=EXP(1) returns 2.71828182845904, the mathematical constant e to Calc's accuracy.see also POWER, LN
+
-FACT function -factorials;numbers -mw added one entry + + FACT function + factorials;numbers + +mw added one entry -FACT -Returns the factorial of a number. -Syntax -FACT(Number) - Returns Number!, the factorial of Number, calculated as 1*2*3*4* ... * Number. -=FACT(0) returns 1 by definition. -The factorial of a negative number returns the "invalid argument" error. -Example - -=FACT(3) returns 6. - -=FACT(0) returns 1.see also FACTDOUBLE, MULTINOMIAL, PRODUCT + +FACT +Returns the factorial of a number. + +Syntax +FACT(Number) +Returns Number!, the factorial of Number, calculated as 1*2*3*4* ... * Number. +=FACT(0) returns 1 by definition. +The factorial of a negative number returns the "invalid argument" error. + +Example +=FACT(3) returns 6. +=FACT(0) returns 1.see also FACTDOUBLE, MULTINOMIAL, PRODUCT
+
-INT function -numbers;rounding down to next integer -rounding;down to next integer -mw added two entries + + INT function + numbers;rounding down to next integer + rounding;down to next integer + +mw added two entries -INT -Rounds a number down to the nearest integer. -Syntax -INT(Number) -Returns Number rounded down to the nearest integer. -Negative numbers round down to the integer below. -Example - -=INT(5.7) returns 5. - -=INT(-1.3) returns -2.see also TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, -CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, + +INT +Rounds a number down to the nearest integer. + +Syntax +INT(Number) +Returns Number rounded down to the nearest integer. +Negative numbers round down to the integer below. + +Example +=INT(5.7) returns 5. +=INT(-1.3) returns -2.see also TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
+
-EVEN function -numbers;rounding up/down to even integers -rounding;up/down to even integers -mw added two entries + + EVEN function + numbers;rounding up/down to even integers + rounding;up/down to even integers + +mw added two entries -EVEN -Rounds a positive number up to the next even integer and a negative number down to the next even integer. -Syntax -EVEN(Number) - Returns Number rounded to the next even integer up, away from zero. -Examples - -=EVEN(2.3) returns 4. - -=EVEN(2) returns 2. - -=EVEN(0) returns 0. - -=EVEN(-0.5) returns -2.see also CEILING, FLOOR, ODD, MROUND, -INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP + +EVEN +Rounds a positive number up to the next even integer and a negative number down to the next even integer. + +Syntax +EVEN(Number) +Returns Number rounded to the next even integer up, away from zero. + +Examples +=EVEN(2.3) returns 4. +=EVEN(2) returns 2. +=EVEN(0) returns 0. +=EVEN(-0.5) returns -2.see also CEILING, FLOOR, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
+
-GCD function -greatest common divisor -mw added one entry + + GCD function + greatest common divisor + +mw added one entry -GCD -Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers. -The greatest common divisor is the positive largest integer which will divide, without remainder, each of the given integers. -Syntax -GCD(Integer1; Integer2; ...; Integer30) -Integer1 To 30 are up to 30 integers whose greatest common divisor is to be calculated. -Example - -=GCD(16;32;24) gives the result 8, because 8 is the largest number that can divide 16, 24 and 32 without a remainder. - -=GCD(B1:B3) where cells B1, B2, B3 contain 9, 12, 9 gives 3. + +GCD +Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers. +The greatest common divisor is the positive largest integer which will divide, without remainder, each of the given integers. + +Syntax +GCD(Integer1; Integer2; ...; Integer30) +Integer1 To 30 are up to 30 integers whose greatest common divisor is to be calculated. + +Example +=GCD(16;32;24) gives the result 8, because 8 is the largest number that can divide 16, 24 and 32 without a remainder. +=GCD(B1:B3) where cells B1, B2, B3 contain 9, 12, 9 gives 3.
+
-GCD_ADD function + + GCD_ADD function + -GCD_ADD - The result is the greatest common divisor of a list of numbers. + +GCD_ADD + The result is the greatest common divisor of a list of numbers. -Syntax -GCD_ADD(Number(s)) -Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. -Example - -=GCD_ADD(5;15;25) returns 5. + +Syntax +GCD_ADD(Number(s)) +Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. + +Example +=GCD_ADD(5;15;25) returns 5.
+
-LCM function -least common multiples -lowest common multiples -mw added two entries + + LCM function + least common multiples + lowest common multiples + +mw added two entries -LCM -Returns the least common multiple of one or more integers. -Syntax -LCM(Integer1; Integer2; ...; Integer30) -Integer1 to 30 are up to 30 integers whose lowest common multiple is to be calculated. -Example -If you enter the numbers 512;1024 and 2000 in the Integer 1;2 and 3 text boxes, 128000 will be returned as the result. + +LCM +Returns the least common multiple of one or more integers. + +Syntax +LCM(Integer1; Integer2; ...; Integer30) +Integer1 to 30 are up to 30 integers whose lowest common multiple is to be calculated. + +Example +If you enter the numbers 512;1024 and 2000 in the Integer 1;2 and 3 text boxes, 128000 will be returned as the result.
+
-LCM_ADD function + + LCM_ADD function + -LCM_ADD - The result is the lowest common multiple of a list of numbers. + +LCM_ADD + The result is the lowest common multiple of a list of numbers. -Syntax -LCM_ADD(Number(s)) -Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. -Example - -=LCM_ADD(5;15;25) returns 75. + +Syntax +LCM_ADD(Number(s)) +Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. + +Example +=LCM_ADD(5;15;25) returns 75.
+
-COMBIN function -number of combinations -mw added one entry + + COMBIN function + number of combinations + +mw added one entry -COMBINshould be statistical-->add a link there -Returns the number of combinations for elements without repetition. -Syntax -COMBIN(Count1; Count2) -Count1 is the number of items in the set. -Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. -COMBIN returns the number of ordered ways to choose these items. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 3 different ways, namely AB, AC and BC. -COMBIN implements the formula: Count1!/(Count2!*(Count1-Count2)!) -Example - -=COMBIN(3;2) returns 3.see also COMBINA + +COMBINshould be statistical-->add a link there +Returns the number of combinations for elements without repetition. + +Syntax +COMBIN(Count1; Count2) +Count1 is the number of items in the set. +Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. +COMBIN returns the number of ordered ways to choose these items. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 3 different ways, namely AB, AC and BC. +COMBIN implements the formula: Count1!/(Count2!*(Count1-Count2)!) + +Example +=COMBIN(3;2) returns 3.see also COMBINA
+
-COMBINA function -number of combinations with repetitions -mw added one entry + + COMBINA function + number of combinations with repetitions + +mw added one entry -COMBINAshould be statistical-->add a link there -Returns the number of combinations of a subset of items including repetitions. -Syntax -COMBINA(Count1; Count2) -Count1 is the number of items in the set. -Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. -COMBINA returns the number of unique ways to choose these items, where the order of choosing is irrelevant, and repetition of items is allowed. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 6 different ways, namely AA, AB, AC, BB, BC and CC. -COMBINA implements the formula: (Count1+Count2-1)! / (Count2!(Count1-1)!)i88052 -Example - -=COMBINA(3;2) returns 6.see also COMBIN + +COMBINAshould be statistical-->add a link there +Returns the number of combinations of a subset of items including repetitions. + +Syntax +COMBINA(Count1; Count2) +Count1 is the number of items in the set. +Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. +COMBINA returns the number of unique ways to choose these items, where the order of choosing is irrelevant, and repetition of items is allowed. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 6 different ways, namely AA, AB, AC, BB, BC and CC. +COMBINA implements the formula: (Count1+Count2-1)! / (Count2!(Count1-1)!)i88052 + +Example +=COMBINA(3;2) returns 6.see also COMBIN
+
-TRUNC function -decimal places;cutting off -mw added one entry + + TRUNC function + decimal places;cutting off + +mw added one entry -TRUNC -Truncates a number by removing decimal places. -Syntax -TRUNC(Number; Count) -Returns Number with at most Count decimal places. Excess decimal places are simply removed, irrespective of sign. - -TRUNC(Number; 0) behaves as INT(Number) for positive numbers, but effectively rounds towards zero for negative numbers. -The visible decimal places of the result are specified in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. -Example - -=TRUNC(1.239;2) returns 1.23. The 9 is lost. - -=TRUNC(-1.234999;3) returns -1.234. All the 9s are lost.see also INT, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, -CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND + +TRUNC +Truncates a number by removing decimal places. + +Syntax +TRUNC(Number; Count) +Returns Number with at most Count decimal places. Excess decimal places are simply removed, irrespective of sign. +TRUNC(Number; 0) behaves as INT(Number) for positive numbers, but effectively rounds towards zero for negative numbers. +The visible decimal places of the result are specified in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. + +Example +=TRUNC(1.239;2) returns 1.23. The 9 is lost. +=TRUNC(-1.234999;3) returns -1.234. All the 9s are lost.see also INT, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
+
-LN function -natural logarithm -mw added one entry + + LN function + natural logarithm + +mw added one entry -LN -Returns the natural logarithm based on the constant e of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. -Syntax -LN(Number) -Number is the value whose natural logarithm is to be calculated. -Example - -=LN(3) returns the natural logarithm of 3 (approximately 1.0986). - -=LN(EXP(321)) returns 321.see also LOG, LOG10, EXP, + +LN +Returns the natural logarithm based on the constant e of a number. The constant e has a value of approximately 2.71828182845904. + +Syntax +LN(Number) +Number is the value whose natural logarithm is to be calculated. + +Example +=LN(3) returns the natural logarithm of 3 (approximately 1.0986). +=LN(EXP(321)) returns 321.see also LOG, LOG10, EXP
+
-LOG function -logarithms -mw added one entry + + LOG function + logarithms + +mw added one entry -LOG -Returns the logarithm of a number to the specified base. -Syntax -LOG(Number; Base) -Number is the value whose logarithm is to be calculated. -Base (optional) is the base for the logarithm calculation. If omitted, Base 10 is assumed. -Example - -=LOG(10;3) returns the logarithm to base 3 of 10 (approximately 2.0959). - -=LOG(7^4;7) returns 4.see also LOG10, LN, POWER, + +LOG +Returns the logarithm of a number to the specified base. + +Syntax +LOG(Number; Base) +Number is the value whose logarithm is to be calculated. +Base (optional) is the base for the logarithm calculation. If omitted, Base 10 is assumed. + +Example +=LOG(10;3) returns the logarithm to base 3 of 10 (approximately 2.0959). +=LOG(7^4;7) returns 4.see also LOG10, LN, POWER
+
-LOG10 function -base-10 logarithm -mw added one entry + + LOG10 function + base-10 logarithm + +mw added one entry -LOG10 -Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number. -Syntax -LOG10(Number) -Returns the logarithm to base 10 of Number. -Example - -=LOG10(5) returns the base-10 logarithm of 5 (approximately 0.69897).see also LOG, LN, POWER + +LOG10 +Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number. + +Syntax +LOG10(Number) +Returns the logarithm to base 10 of Number. + +Example +=LOG10(5) returns the base-10 logarithm of 5 (approximately 0.69897).see also LOG, LN, POWER
+
-CEILING function -rounding;up to multiples of significance -mw added one entry + + CEILING function + rounding;up to multiples of significance + +mw added one entry -CEILING -Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of Significance. -Syntax -CEILING(Number; Significance; Mode) -Number is the number that is to be rounded up. -Significance is the number to whose multiple the value is to be rounded up. -Mode is an optional value. If the Mode value is given and not equal to zero, and if Number and Significance are negative, then rounding is done based on the absolute value of Number. This parameter is ignored when exporting to MS Excel as Excel does not know any third parameter. -If both parameters Number and Significance are negative and the Mode value is equal to zero or is not given, the results in $[officename] and Excel will differ after the import has been completed. If you export the spreadsheet to Excel, use Mode=1 to see the same results in Excel as in Calc. -Example - -=CEILING(-11;-2) returns -10 - -=CEILING(-11;-2;0) returns -10 - -=CEILING(-11;-2;1) returns -12see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, -INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP + +CEILING +Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of Significance. + +Syntax +CEILING(Number; Significance; Mode) +Number is the number that is to be rounded up. +Significance is the number to whose multiple the value is to be rounded up. +Mode is an optional value. If the Mode value is given and not equal to zero, and if Number and Significance are negative, then rounding is done based on the absolute value of Number. This parameter is ignored when exporting to MS Excel as Excel does not know any third parameter. +If both parameters Number and Significance are negative and the Mode value is equal to zero or is not given, the results in $[officename] and Excel will differ after the import has been completed. If you export the spreadsheet to Excel, use Mode=1 to see the same results in Excel as in Calc. + +Example +=CEILING(-11;-2) returns -10 +=CEILING(-11;-2;0) returns -10 +=CEILING(-11;-2;1) returns -12see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
+
-CEILING.PRECISE function -rounding;up to multiples of significance -mw added one entry + + CEILING.PRECISE function + rounding;up to multiples of significance + +mw added one entry -CEILING.PRECISE -Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of Significance, regardless of sign of Significance -Syntax -CEILING.PRECISE(Number; Significance) -Number (required) is the number that is to be rounded up. -Significance (optional) is the number to whose multiple the value is to be rounded up. -Example - -=CEILING.PRECISE(-11;-2) returns -10 -see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP + +CEILING.PRECISE +Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of Significance, regardless of sign of Significance + +Syntax +CEILING.PRECISE(Number; Significance) +Number (required) is the number that is to be rounded up. +Significance (optional) is the number to whose multiple the value is to be rounded up. + +Example +=CEILING.PRECISE(-11;-2) returns -10see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
+
-ISO.CEILING function -rounding;up to multiples of significance -mw added one entry + + ISO.CEILING function + rounding;up to multiples of significance + +mw added one entry -ISO.CEILING -Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of Significance, regardless of sign of Significance -Syntax -ISO.CEILING(Number; Significance) -Number (required) is the number that is to be rounded up. -Significance (optional) is the number to whose multiple the value is to be rounded up. -Example - -=ISO.CEILING(-11;-2) returns -10 -see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP + +ISO.CEILING +Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of Significance, regardless of sign of Significance + +Syntax +ISO.CEILING(Number; Significance) +Number (required) is the number that is to be rounded up. +Significance (optional) is the number to whose multiple the value is to be rounded up. + +Example +=ISO.CEILING(-11;-2) returns -10see also FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
+
-PI function + + PI function + -PI -Returns 3.14159265358979, the value of the mathematical constant PI to 14 decimal places. -Syntax -PI() -Example - -=PI() returns 3.14159265358979. + +PI +Returns 3.14159265358979, the value of the mathematical constant PI to 14 decimal places. + +Syntax +PI() + +Example +=PI() returns 3.14159265358979.
+
-MULTINOMIAL function + + MULTINOMIAL function + -MULTINOMIAL - Returns the factorial of the sum of the arguments divided by the product of the factorials of the arguments. -Syntax -MULTINOMIAL(Number(s)) -Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. -Example - -=MULTINOMIAL(F11:H11) returns 1260, if F11 to H11 contain the values 2, 3 and 4. This corresponds to the formula =(2+3+4)! / (2!*3!*4!) + +MULTINOMIAL + Returns the factorial of the sum of the arguments divided by the product of the factorials of the arguments. + +Syntax +MULTINOMIAL(Number(s)) +Number(s) is a list of up to 30 numbers. + +Example +=MULTINOMIAL(F11:H11) returns 1260, if F11 to H11 contain the values 2, 3 and 4. This corresponds to the formula =(2+3+4)! / (2!*3!*4!)
+
-POWER function + + POWER function + -POWER -Returns a number raised to another number. -Syntax -POWER(Base; Exponent) -Returns Base raised to the power of Exponent. -The same result may be achieved by using the exponentiation operator ^: - -Base^Exponent - -Example - -=POWER(4;3) returns 64, which is 4 to the power of 3. -=4^3 also returns 4 to the power of 3.see also EXP, LOG, SQRT + +POWER +Returns a number raised to another number. + +Syntax +POWER(Base; Exponent) +Returns Base raised to the power of Exponent. +The same result may be achieved by using the exponentiation operator ^: +Base^Exponent + +Example +=POWER(4;3) returns 64, which is 4 to the power of 3. +=4^3 also returns 4 to the power of 3.see also EXP, LOG, SQRT
+
-SERIESSUM function + + SERIESSUM function + -SERIESSUM -Sums the first terms of a power series. -SERIESSUM(x;n;m;coefficients) = coefficient_1*x^n + coefficient_2*x^(n+m) + coefficient_3*x^(n+2m) +...+ coefficient_i*x^(n+(i-1)m) -Syntax -SERIESSUM(X; N; M; Coefficients) -X is the input value for the power series. -N is the initial power -M is the increment to increase N -Coefficients is a series of coefficients. For each coefficient the series sum is extended by one section. + +SERIESSUM +Sums the first terms of a power series. +SERIESSUM(x;n;m;coefficients) = coefficient_1*x^n + coefficient_2*x^(n+m) + coefficient_3*x^(n+2m) +...+ coefficient_i*x^(n+(i-1)m) + +Syntax +SERIESSUM(X; N; M; Coefficients) +X is the input value for the power series. +N is the initial power +M is the increment to increase N +Coefficients is a series of coefficients. For each coefficient the series sum is extended by one section.
+
-PRODUCT function -numbers;multiplying -multiplying;numbers -mw added two entries + + PRODUCT function + numbers;multiplying + multiplying;numbers + +mw added two entries -PRODUCT -Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product. -Syntax -PRODUCT(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) -Number1 to 30 are up to 30 arguments whose product is to be calculated. -PRODUCT returns number1 * number2 * number3 * ... -Example - -=PRODUCT(2;3;4) returns 24.see also FACT, SUM + +PRODUCT +Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product. + +Syntax +PRODUCT(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) +Number1 to 30 are up to 30 arguments whose product is to be calculated. +PRODUCT returns number1 * number2 * number3 * ... + +Example +=PRODUCT(2;3;4) returns 24.see also FACT, SUM
+
-SUMSQ function -square number additions -sums;of square numbers -mw added two entries + + SUMSQ function + square number additions + sums;of square numbers + +mw added two entries -SUMSQ -If you want to calculate the sum of the squares of numbers (totaling up of the squares of the arguments), enter these into the text fields. -Syntax -SUMSQ(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) -Number1 to 30 are up to 30 arguments the sum of whose squares is to be calculated. -Example -If you enter the numbers 2; 3 and 4 in the Number 1; 2 and 3 text boxes, 29 is returned as the result. + +SUMSQ +If you want to calculate the sum of the squares of numbers (totaling up of the squares of the arguments), enter these into the text fields. + +Syntax +SUMSQ(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) +Number1 to 30 are up to 30 arguments the sum of whose squares is to be calculated. + +Example +If you enter the numbers 2; 3 and 4 in the Number 1; 2 and 3 text boxes, 29 is returned as the result.
+
-MOD function -remainders of divisions -mw added one entry + + MOD function + remainders of divisions + +mw added one entry -MOD -Returns the remainder when one integer is divided by another. -Syntax -MOD(Dividend; Divisor) - For integer arguments this function returns Dividend modulo Divisor, that is the remainder when Dividend is divided by Divisor. -This function is implemented as Dividend - Divisor * INT(Dividend/Divisor) , and this formula gives the result if the arguments are not integer. -Example - -=MOD(22;3) returns 1, the remainder when 22 is divided by 3. - -=MOD(11.25;2.5) returns 1.25.see also QUOTIENT, INT, + +MOD +Returns the remainder when one integer is divided by another. + +Syntax +MOD(Dividend; Divisor) +For integer arguments this function returns Dividend modulo Divisor, that is the remainder when Dividend is divided by Divisor. +This function is implemented as Dividend - Divisor * INT(Dividend/Divisor) , and this formula gives the result if the arguments are not integer. + +Example +=MOD(22;3) returns 1, the remainder when 22 is divided by 3. +=MOD(11.25;2.5) returns 1.25.see also QUOTIENT, INT
+
-QUOTIENT function -divisions -mw added one entry + + QUOTIENT function + divisions + +mw added one entry -QUOTIENT -Returns the integer part of a division operation. -Syntax -QUOTIENT(Numerator; Denominator) -Returns the integer part of Numerator divided by Denominator. -QUOTIENT is equivalent to INT(numerator/denominator), except that it may report errors with different error codes. -Example - -=QUOTIENT(11;3) returns 3. The remainder of 2 is lost.see also MOD, INT + +QUOTIENT +Returns the integer part of a division operation. + +Syntax +QUOTIENT(Numerator; Denominator) +Returns the integer part of Numerator divided by Denominator. +QUOTIENT is equivalent to INT(numerator/denominator), except that it may report errors with different error codes. + +Example +=QUOTIENT(11;3) returns 3. The remainder of 2 is lost.see also MOD, INT
+
-RADIANS function -converting;degrees, into radians -mw added one entry + + RADIANS function + converting;degrees, into radians + +mw added one entry -RADIANS -Converts degrees to radians. -Syntax -RADIANS(Number) -Number is the angle in degrees to be converted to radians. -Example - -=RADIANS(90) returns 1.5707963267949, which is PI/2 to Calc's accuracy.see also DEGREES + +RADIANS +Converts degrees to radians. + +Syntax +RADIANS(Number) +Number is the angle in degrees to be converted to radians. + +Example +=RADIANS(90) returns 1.5707963267949, which is PI/2 to Calc's accuracy.see also DEGREES
+
-ROUND function + + ROUND function + -ROUND -Rounds a number to a certain number of decimal places. -Syntax -ROUND(Number; Count) -Returns Number rounded to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds to the nearest integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds to the nearest 10, 100, 1000, etc. -This function rounds to the nearest number. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUNDUP for alternatives. -Example - -=ROUND(2.348;2) returns 2.35 - -=ROUND(-32.4834;3) returns -32.483. Change the cell format to see all decimals. - -=ROUND(2.348;0) returns 2. - -=ROUND(2.5) returns 3. - -=ROUND(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, -CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND + +ROUND +Rounds a number to a certain number of decimal places. + +Syntax +ROUND(Number; Count) +Returns Number rounded to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds to the nearest integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds to the nearest 10, 100, 1000, etc. +This function rounds to the nearest number. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUNDUP for alternatives. + +Example +=ROUND(2.348;2) returns 2.35 +=ROUND(-32.4834;3) returns -32.483. Change the cell format to see all decimals. +=ROUND(2.348;0) returns 2. +=ROUND(2.5) returns 3. +=ROUND(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
+
-ROUNDDOWN function + + ROUNDDOWN function + -ROUNDDOWN -Rounds a number down, toward zero, to a certain precision. -Syntax -ROUNDDOWN(Number; Count) -Returns Number rounded down (towards zero) to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds down to an integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds down to the next 10, 100, 1000, etc. -This function rounds towards zero. See ROUNDUP and ROUND for alternatives. -Example - -=ROUNDDOWN(1.234;2) returns 1.23. - -=ROUNDDOWN(45.67;0) returns 45. - -=ROUNDDOWN(-45.67) returns -45. - -=ROUNDDOWN(987.65;-2) returns 900.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDUP, -CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND + +ROUNDDOWN +Rounds a number down, toward zero, to a certain precision. + +Syntax +ROUNDDOWN(Number; Count) +Returns Number rounded down (towards zero) to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds down to an integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds down to the next 10, 100, 1000, etc. +This function rounds towards zero. See ROUNDUP and ROUND for alternatives. + +Example +=ROUNDDOWN(1.234;2) returns 1.23. +=ROUNDDOWN(45.67;0) returns 45. +=ROUNDDOWN(-45.67) returns -45. +=ROUNDDOWN(987.65;-2) returns 900.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDUP, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
+
-ROUNDUP function + + ROUNDUP function + -ROUNDUP -Rounds a number up, away from zero, to a certain precision. -Syntax -ROUNDUP(Number; Count) -Returns Number rounded up (away from zero) to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds up to an integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds up to the next 10, 100, 1000, etc. -This function rounds away from zero. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUND for alternatives. -Example - -=ROUNDUP(1.1111;2) returns 1.12. - -=ROUNDUP(1.2345;1) returns 1.3. - -=ROUNDUP(45.67;0) returns 46. - -=ROUNDUP(-45.67) returns -46. - -=ROUNDUP(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, -CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND + +ROUNDUP +Rounds a number up, away from zero, to a certain precision. + +Syntax +ROUNDUP(Number; Count) +Returns Number rounded up (away from zero) to Count decimal places. If Count is omitted or zero, the function rounds up to an integer. If Count is negative, the function rounds up to the next 10, 100, 1000, etc. +This function rounds away from zero. See ROUNDDOWN and ROUND for alternatives. + +Example +=ROUNDUP(1.1111;2) returns 1.12. +=ROUNDUP(1.2345;1) returns 1.3. +=ROUNDUP(45.67;0) returns 46. +=ROUNDUP(-45.67) returns -46. +=ROUNDUP(987.65;-2) returns 1000.see also INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, MROUND
+
-SEC function + + SEC function + -SEC -Returns the secant of the given angle (in radians). The secant of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the cosine of that angle -Syntax -SEC(Number) - Returns the (trigonometric) secant of Number, the angle in radians. -To return the secant of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. -Examples - -=SEC(PI()/4) returns approximately 1.4142135624, the inverse of the cosine of PI/4 radians. - -=SEC(RADIANS(60)) returns 2, the secant of 60 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, CSC, -ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +SEC +Returns the secant of the given angle (in radians). The secant of an angle is equivalent to 1 divided by the cosine of that angle + +Syntax +SEC(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) secant of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the secant of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + +Examples +=SEC(PI()/4) returns approximately 1.4142135624, the inverse of the cosine of PI/4 radians. +=SEC(RADIANS(60)) returns 2, the secant of 60 degrees.see also SIN, TAN, COT, CSC, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
+
-SECH function + + SECH function + -SECH -Returns the hyperbolic secant of a number. -Syntax -SECH(Number) -Returns the hyperbolic secant of Number. -Example - -=SECH(0) returns 1, the hyperbolic secant of 0.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, CSCH, -ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH + +SECH +Returns the hyperbolic secant of a number. + +Syntax +SECH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic secant of Number. + +Example +=SECH(0) returns 1, the hyperbolic secant of 0.see also SINH, TANH, COTH, CSCH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH
+
-SIN function + + SIN function + -SIN -Returns the sine of the given angle (in radians). -Syntax -SIN(Number) -Returns the (trigonometric) sine of Number, the angle in radians. -To return the sine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. -Example - -=SIN(PI()/2) returns 1, the sine of PI/2 radians. - -=SIN(RADIANS(30)) returns 0.5, the sine of 30 degrees.see also COS, TAN, COT, -ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +SIN +Returns the sine of the given angle (in radians). + +Syntax +SIN(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) sine of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the sine of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + +Example +=SIN(PI()/2) returns 1, the sine of PI/2 radians. +=SIN(RADIANS(30)) returns 0.5, the sine of 30 degrees.see also COS, TAN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
+
-SINH function + + SINH function + -SINH -Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number. -Syntax -SINH(Number) -Returns the hyperbolic sine of Number. -Example - -=SINH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic sine of 0.see also COSH, TANH, COTH, -ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH + +SINH +Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number. + +Syntax +SINH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic sine of Number. + +Example +=SINH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic sine of 0.see also COSH, TANH, COTH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH
+
-SUM function -adding;numbers in cell ranges -mw added one entry + + SUM function + adding;numbers in cell ranges + +mw added one entry -SUM -Adds all the numbers in a range of cells. -Syntax -SUM(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) -Number 1 to Number 30 are up to 30 arguments whose sum is to be calculated. -Example -If you enter the numbers 2; 3 and 4 in the Number 1; 2 and 3 text boxes, 9 will be returned as the result. - -=SUM(A1;A3;B5) calculates the sum of the three cells. =SUM (A1:E10) calculates the sum of all cells in the A1 to E10 cell range. -Conditions linked by AND can be used with the function SUM() in the following manner: -Example assumption: You have entered invoices into a table. Column A contains the date value of the invoice, column B the amounts. You want to find a formula that you can use to return the total of all amounts only for a specific month, e.g. only the amount for the period >=2008-01-01 to <2008-02-01. The range with the date values covers A1:A40, the range containing the amounts to be totaled is B1:B40. C1 contains the start date, 2008-01-01, of the invoices to be included and C2 the date, 2008-02-01, that is no longer included. -Enter the following formula as an array formula: - -=SUM((A1:A40>=C1)*(A1:A40<C2)*B1:B40) - -In order to enter this as an array formula, you must press the Shift+Command -+ Ctrl+ Enter keys instead of simply pressing the Enter key to close the formula. The formula will then be shown in the Formula bar enclosed in braces. -{=SUM((A1:A40>=C1)*(A1:A40<C2)*B1:B40)} -The formula is based on the fact that the result of a comparison is 1 if the criterion is met and 0 if it is not met. The individual comparison results will be treated as an array and used in matrix multiplication, and at the end the individual values will be totaled to give the result matrix. + +SUM +Adds all the numbers in a range of cells. + +Syntax +SUM(Number1; Number2; ...; Number30) +Number 1 to Number 30 are up to 30 arguments whose sum is to be calculated. + +Example +If you enter the numbers 2; 3 and 4 in the Number 1; 2 and 3 text boxes, 9 will be returned as the result. +=SUM(A1;A3;B5) calculates the sum of the three cells. =SUM (A1:E10) calculates the sum of all cells in the A1 to E10 cell range. +Conditions linked by AND can be used with the function SUM() in the following manner: +Example assumption: You have entered invoices into a table. Column A contains the date value of the invoice, column B the amounts. You want to find a formula that you can use to return the total of all amounts only for a specific month, e.g. only the amount for the period >=2008-01-01 to <2008-02-01. The range with the date values covers A1:A40, the range containing the amounts to be totaled is B1:B40. C1 contains the start date, 2008-01-01, of the invoices to be included and C2 the date, 2008-02-01, that is no longer included. +Enter the following formula as an array formula: +=SUM((A1:A40>=C1)*(A1:A40<C2)*B1:B40) +In order to enter this as an array formula, you must press the Shift+Command+ Ctrl+ Enter keys instead of simply pressing the Enter key to close the formula. The formula will then be shown in the Formula bar enclosed in braces. +{=SUM((A1:A40>=C1)*(A1:A40<C2)*B1:B40)} +The formula is based on the fact that the result of a comparison is 1 if the criterion is met and 0 if it is not met. The individual comparison results will be treated as an array and used in matrix multiplication, and at the end the individual values will be totaled to give the result matrix.
+
-SUMIF function -adding;specified numbers -mw added one entry + + SUMIF function + adding;specified numbers + +mw added one entry -SUMIF -Adds the cells specified by a given criteria. This function is used to browse a range when you search for a certain value. + +SUMIF +Adds the cells specified by a given criteria. This function is used to browse a range when you search for a certain value. -Syntax -SUMIF(Range; Criteria; SumRange) -Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. -Criteria is the cell in which the search criterion is shown, or the search criterion itself. If the criteria is written into the formula, it has to be surrounded by double quotes. -SumRange is the range from which values are summed. If this parameter has not been indicated, the values found in the Range are summed. -SUMIF supports the reference concatenation operator (~) only in the Criteria parameter, and only if the optional SumRange parameter is not given. -Example -To sum up only negative numbers: =SUMIF(A1:A10;"<0") - - -=SUMIF(A1:A10;">0";B1:10) - sums values from the range B1:B10 only if the corresponding values in the range A1:A10 are >0. -See COUNTIF() for some more syntax examples that can be used with SUMIF(). + +Syntax +SUMIF(Range; Criteria; SumRange) +Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. +Criteria is the cell in which the search criterion is shown, or the search criterion itself. If the criteria is written into the formula, it has to be surrounded by double quotes. +SumRange is the range from which values are summed. If this parameter has not been indicated, the values found in the Range are summed. +SUMIF supports the reference concatenation operator (~) only in the Criteria parameter, and only if the optional SumRange parameter is not given. + +Example +To sum up only negative numbers: =SUMIF(A1:A10;"<0") +=SUMIF(A1:A10;">0";B1:10) - sums values from the range B1:B10 only if the corresponding values in the range A1:A10 are >0. +See COUNTIF() for some more syntax examples that can be used with SUMIF().
+
+
+
-TAN function + + TAN function + -TAN -Returns the tangent of the given angle (in radians). -Syntax -TAN(Number) -Returns the (trigonometric) tangent of Number, the angle in radians. -To return the tangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. -Example - -=TAN(PI()/4) returns 1, the tangent of PI/4 radians. - -=TAN(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the tangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, COT, -ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT + +TAN +Returns the tangent of the given angle (in radians). + +Syntax +TAN(Number) +Returns the (trigonometric) tangent of Number, the angle in radians. +To return the tangent of an angle in degrees, use the RADIANS function. + +Example +=TAN(PI()/4) returns 1, the tangent of PI/4 radians. +=TAN(RADIANS(45)) returns 1, the tangent of 45 degrees.see also COS, SIN, COT, ACOS, ASIN, ATAN, ATAN2, ACOT
+
-TANH function + + TANH function + -TANH -Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number. -Syntax -TANH(Number) -Returns the hyperbolic tangent of Number. -Example - -=TANH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic tangent of 0.see also COSH, SINH, COTH, -ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH + +TANH +Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number. + +Syntax +TANH(Number) +Returns the hyperbolic tangent of Number. + +Example +=TANH(0) returns 0, the hyperbolic tangent of 0.see also COSH, SINH, COTH, ACOSH, ASINH, ATANH, ACOTH
+
-AutoFilter function; subtotals -sums;of filtered data -filtered data; sums -SUBTOTAL function -mw made "sums..." a two level entry + + AutoFilter function; subtotals + sums;of filtered data + filtered data; sums + SUBTOTAL function + +mw made "sums..." a two level entry -SUBTOTAL -Calculates subtotals. If a range already contains subtotals, these are not used for further calculations. Use this function with the AutoFilters to take only the filtered records into account. -Syntax -SUBTOTAL(Function; Range) -Function is a number that stands for one of the following functions: + +SUBTOTAL +Calculates subtotals. If a range already contains subtotals, these are not used for further calculations. Use this function with the AutoFilters to take only the filtered records into account. + +Syntax +SUBTOTAL(Function; Range) +Function is a number that stands for one of the following functions: + - - -Function index - - -Function - - - - -1 - - -AVERAGE - - - - -2 - - -COUNT - - - - -3 - - -COUNTA - - - - -4 - - -MAX - - - - -5 - - -MIN - - - - -6 - - -PRODUCT - - - - -7 - - -STDEV - - - - -8 - - -STDEVP - - - - -9 - - -SUM - - - - -10 - - -VAR - - - - -11 - - -VARP - - + + + Function index + + + Function + + + + + 1 + + + AVERAGE + + + + + 2 + + + COUNT + + + + + 3 + + + COUNTA + + + + + 4 + + + MAX + + + + + 5 + + + MIN + + + + + 6 + + + PRODUCT + + + + + 7 + + + STDEV + + + + + 8 + + + STDEVP + + + + + 9 + + + SUM + + + + + 10 + + + VAR + + + + + 11 + + + VARP + +
-Range is the range whose cells are included. -Example -You have a table in the cell range A1:B5 containing cities in column A and accompanying figures in column B. You have used an AutoFilter so that you only see rows containing the city Hamburg. You want to see the sum of the figures that are displayed; that is, just the subtotal for the filtered rows. In this case the correct formula would be: - -=SUBTOTAL(9;B2:B5) - +Range is the range whose cells are included. + +Example +You have a table in the cell range A1:B5 containing cities in column A and accompanying figures in column B. You have used an AutoFilter so that you only see rows containing the city Hamburg. You want to see the sum of the figures that are displayed; that is, just the subtotal for the filtered rows. In this case the correct formula would be: +=SUBTOTAL(9;B2:B5)
+
-Euro; converting -EUROCONVERT function + + Euro; converting + EUROCONVERT function + -EUROCONVERTinsert link in financial -Converts between old European national currency and to and from Euros. -Syntax - -EUROCONVERT(Value; "From_currency"; "To_currency", full_precision, triangulation_precision) -Value is the amount of the currency to be converted. -From_currency and To_currency are the currency units to convert from and to respectively. These must be text, the official abbreviation for the currency (for example, "EUR"). The rates (shown per Euro) were set by the European Commission. -Full_precision is optional. If omitted or False, the result is rounded according to the decimals of the To currency. If Full_precision is True, the result is not rounded. -Triangulation_precision is optional. If Triangulation_precision is given and >=3, the intermediate result of a triangular conversion (currency1,EUR,currency2) is rounded to that precision. If Triangulation_precision is omitted, the intermediate result is not rounded. Also if To currency is "EUR", Triangulation_precision is used as if triangulation was needed and conversion from EUR to EUR was applied. -Examples - - -=EUROCONVERT(100;"ATS";"EUR") converts 100 Austrian Schillings into Euros. - -=EUROCONVERT(100;"EUR";"DEM") converts 100 Euros into German Marks. + +EUROCONVERTinsert link in financial +Converts between old European national currency and to and from Euros. + +Syntax +EUROCONVERT(Value; "From_currency"; "To_currency", full_precision, triangulation_precision) +Value is the amount of the currency to be converted. +From_currency and To_currency are the currency units to convert from and to respectively. These must be text, the official abbreviation for the currency (for example, "EUR"). The rates (shown per Euro) were set by the European Commission. +Full_precision is optional. If omitted or False, the result is rounded according to the decimals of the To currency. If Full_precision is True, the result is not rounded. +Triangulation_precision is optional. If Triangulation_precision is given and >=3, the intermediate result of a triangular conversion (currency1,EUR,currency2) is rounded to that precision. If Triangulation_precision is omitted, the intermediate result is not rounded. Also if To currency is "EUR", Triangulation_precision is used as if triangulation was needed and conversion from EUR to EUR was applied. + +Examples +=EUROCONVERT(100;"ATS";"EUR") converts 100 Austrian Schillings into Euros. +=EUROCONVERT(100;"EUR";"DEM") converts 100 Euros into German Marks.
+
-CONVERT function + + CONVERT function + -CONVERT -Converts a value from one unit of measurement to another unit of measurement. The conversion factors are given in a list in the configuration. -At one time the list of conversion factors included the legacy European currencies and the Euro (see examples below). We suggest using the new function EUROCONVERT for converting these currencies. -Syntax -CONVERT(value;"text";"text") -Example - -=CONVERT(100;"ATS";"EUR") returns the Euro value of 100 Austrian Schillings. -=CONVERT(100;"EUR";"DEM") converts 100 Euros into German Marks. + +CONVERT +Converts a value from one unit of measurement to another unit of measurement. The conversion factors are given in a list in the configuration. +At one time the list of conversion factors included the legacy European currencies and the Euro (see examples below). We suggest using the new function EUROCONVERT for converting these currencies. + +Syntax +CONVERT(value;"text";"text") + +Example +=CONVERT(100;"ATS";"EUR") returns the Euro value of 100 Austrian Schillings. +=CONVERT(100;"EUR";"DEM") converts 100 Euros into German Marks.
+
-ODD function -rounding;up/down to nearest odd integer -mw added one entry + + ODD function + rounding;up/down to nearest odd integer + +mw added one entry -ODD -Rounds a positive number up to the nearest odd integer and a negative number down to the nearest odd integer. -Syntax -ODD(Number) - Returns Number rounded to the next odd integer up, away from zero. -Example - -=ODD(1.2) returns 3. - -=ODD(1) returns 1. - -=ODD(0) returns 1. - -=ODD(-3.1) returns -5.see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, MROUND, -INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP + +ODD +Rounds a positive number up to the nearest odd integer and a negative number down to the nearest odd integer. + +Syntax +ODD(Number) +Returns Number rounded to the next odd integer up, away from zero. + +Example +=ODD(1.2) returns 3. +=ODD(1) returns 1. +=ODD(0) returns 1. +=ODD(-3.1) returns -5.see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
+
-FLOOR.PRECISE function -rounding;down to nearest multiple of significance -mw added one entry + + FLOOR.PRECISE function + rounding;down to nearest multiple of significance + +mw added one entry -FLOOR.PRECISE -Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of Significance, regardless of sign of Significance -Syntax -FLOOR.PRECISE(Number; Significance) -Number is the number that is to be rounded down. -Significance is the value to whose multiple the number is to be rounded down. -Example - =FLOOR.PRECISE( -11;-2) returns -12 -see also CEILING, EVEN, ODD, MROUND,INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, + +FLOOR.PRECISE +Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of Significance, regardless of sign of Significance + +Syntax +FLOOR.PRECISE(Number; Significance) +Number is the number that is to be rounded down. +Significance is the value to whose multiple the number is to be rounded down. + +Example +=FLOOR.PRECISE( -11;-2) returns -12see also CEILING, EVEN, ODD, MROUND,INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
+
-FLOOR function -rounding;down to nearest multiple of significance -mw added one entry + + FLOOR function + rounding;down to nearest multiple of significance + +mw added one entry -FLOOR -Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of Significance. -Syntax -FLOOR(Number; Significance; Mode) -Number is the number that is to be rounded down. -Significance is the value to whose multiple the number is to be rounded down. -Mode is an optional value. If the Mode value is given and not equal to zero, and if Number and Significance are negative, then rounding is done based on the absolute value of the number. This parameter is ignored when exporting to MS Excel as Excel does not know any third parameter. -If both parameters Number and Significance are negative, and if the Mode value is equal to zero or is not specified, then the results in $[officename] Calc and Excel will differ after exporting. If you export the spreadsheet to Excel, use Mode=1 to see the same results in Excel as in Calc. -Example - -=FLOOR( -11;-2) returns -12 - -=FLOOR( -11;-2;0) returns -12 - -=FLOOR( -11;-2;1) returns -10see also CEILING, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, -INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP, + +FLOOR +Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of Significance. + +Syntax +FLOOR(Number; Significance; Mode) +Number is the number that is to be rounded down. +Significance is the value to whose multiple the number is to be rounded down. +Mode is an optional value. If the Mode value is given and not equal to zero, and if Number and Significance are negative, then rounding is done based on the absolute value of the number. This parameter is ignored when exporting to MS Excel as Excel does not know any third parameter. +If both parameters Number and Significance are negative, and if the Mode value is equal to zero or is not specified, then the results in $[officename] Calc and Excel will differ after exporting. If you export the spreadsheet to Excel, use Mode=1 to see the same results in Excel as in Calc. + +Example +=FLOOR( -11;-2) returns -12 +=FLOOR( -11;-2;0) returns -12 +=FLOOR( -11;-2;1) returns -10see also CEILING, EVEN, ODD, MROUND, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
+
-SIGN function -algebraic signs -mw added one entry + + SIGN function + algebraic signs + +mw added one entry -SIGN -Returns the sign of a number. Returns 1 if the number is positive, -1 if negative and 0 if zero. -Syntax -SIGN(Number) -Number is the number whose sign is to be determined. -Example - -=SIGN(3.4) returns 1. - -=SIGN(-4.5) returns -1.see also ABS + +SIGN +Returns the sign of a number. Returns 1 if the number is positive, -1 if negative and 0 if zero. + +Syntax +SIGN(Number) +Number is the number whose sign is to be determined. + +Example +=SIGN(3.4) returns 1. +=SIGN(-4.5) returns -1.see also ABS
+
-MROUND function -nearest multiple -mw added one entry + + MROUND function + nearest multiple + +mw added one entry -MROUND -Returns a number rounded to the nearest multiple of another number. -Syntax -MROUND(Number; Multiple) -Returns Number rounded to the nearest multiple of Multiple. -An alternative implementation would be Multiple * ROUND(Number/Multiple). -Example - -=MROUND(15.5;3) returns 15, as 15.5 is closer to 15 (= 3*5) than to 18 (= 3*6). - -=MROUND(1.4;0.5) returns 1.5 (= 0.5*3).see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, -INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP + +MROUND +Returns a number rounded to the nearest multiple of another number. + +Syntax +MROUND(Number; Multiple) +Returns Number rounded to the nearest multiple of Multiple. +An alternative implementation would be Multiple * ROUND(Number/Multiple). + +Example +=MROUND(15.5;3) returns 15, as 15.5 is closer to 15 (= 3*5) than to 18 (= 3*6). +=MROUND(1.4;0.5) returns 1.5 (= 0.5*3).see also CEILING, FLOOR, EVEN, ODD, INT, TRUNC, ROUND, ROUNDDOWN, ROUNDUP
+
-SQRT function -square roots;positive numbers -mw added one entry + + SQRT function + square roots;positive numbers + +mw added one entry -SQRT -Returns the positive square root of a number. -Syntax -SQRT(Number) -Returns the positive square root of Number. - Number must be positive. -Example - -=SQRT(16) returns 4. - -=SQRT(-16) returns an invalid argument error.see also SQRTPI, POWER + +SQRT +Returns the positive square root of a number. + +Syntax +SQRT(Number) +Returns the positive square root of Number. +Number must be positive. + +Example +=SQRT(16) returns 4. +=SQRT(-16) returns an invalid argument error.see also SQRTPI, POWER
+
-SQRTPI function -square roots;products of Pi -mw added one entry + + SQRTPI function + square roots;products of Pi + +mw added one entry -SQRTPI -Returns the square root of (PI times a number). -Syntax -SQRTPI(Number) -Returns the positive square root of (PI multiplied by Number). -This is equivalent to SQRT(PI()*Number). -Example - -=SQRTPI(2) returns the squareroot of (2PI), approximately 2.506628.see also SQRT + +SQRTPI +Returns the square root of (PI times a number). + +Syntax +SQRTPI(Number) +Returns the positive square root of (PI multiplied by Number). +This is equivalent to SQRT(PI()*Number). + +Example +=SQRTPI(2) returns the squareroot of (2PI), approximately 2.506628.see also SQRT
+
-random numbers; between limits -RANDBETWEEN function -mw changed "random numbers;" + + random numbers; between limits + RANDBETWEEN function + +mw changed "random numbers;" -RANDBETWEEN -Returns an integer random number in a specified range. -Syntax -RANDBETWEEN(Bottom; Top) -Returns an integer random number between integers Bottom and Top (both inclusive). -This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press Shift+Command -Ctrl+F9. -To generate random numbers which never recalculate, copy cells containing this function, and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). -Example - -=RANDBETWEEN(20;30) returns an integer of between 20 and 30.see also RAND + +RANDBETWEEN +Returns an integer random number in a specified range. + +Syntax +RANDBETWEEN(Bottom; Top) +Returns an integer random number between integers Bottom and Top (both inclusive). +This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press Shift+CommandCtrl+F9. +To generate random numbers which never recalculate, copy cells containing this function, and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). + +Example +=RANDBETWEEN(20;30) returns an integer of between 20 and 30.see also RAND
+
-RAND function -random numbers;between 0 and 1 -mw added one entry + + RAND function + random numbers;between 0 and 1 + +mw added one entry -RAND -Returns a random number between 0 and 1.The value of 0 can be returned, the value of 1 not.this is really true after issue 53642 will be fixed -Syntax -RAND() -This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press F9. -To generate random numbers which never recalculate, copy cells each containing =RAND(), and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). -Example - -=RAND() returns a random number between 0 and 1.see also RANDBETWEEN - + +RAND +Returns a random number between 0 and 1.The value of 0 can be returned, the value of 1 not.this is really true after issue 53642 will be fixed + +Syntax +RAND() +This function produces a new random number each time Calc recalculates. To force Calc to recalculate manually press F9. +To generate random numbers which never recalculate, copy cells each containing =RAND(), and use Edit - Paste Special (with Paste All and Formulas not marked and Numbers marked). + +Example +=RAND() returns a random number between 0 and 1.see also RANDBETWEEN
+
+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp index 542a818ce0..98a9a95724 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - -Array Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp - + + Array Functions + /text/scalc/01/04060107.xhp + + -matrices; functions -Function Wizard; arrays -array formulas -inline array constants -formulas;arrays -functions;array functions -editing; array formulas -copying; array formulas -adjusting array ranges -calculating;conditional calculations -matrices; calculations -conditional calculations with arrays -implicit array handling -forced array handling -mw deleted "creating;" -Array Functions -This category contains the array functions. - -What is an Array? -An array is a linked range of cells on a spreadsheet containing values. - A square range of 3 rows and 3 columns is a 3 x 3 array: + + + matrices; functions + Function Wizard; arrays + array formulas + inline array constants + formulas;arrays + functions;array functions + editing; array formulas + copying; array formulas + adjusting array ranges + calculating;conditional calculations + matrices; calculations + conditional calculations with arrays + implicit array handling + forced array handling + +mw deleted "creating;" + +Array Functions +This category contains the array functions. + +What is an Array? +An array is a linked range of cells on a spreadsheet containing values. A square range of 3 rows and 3 columns is a 3 x 3 array: + - - - - -A - - -B - - -C - - - - -1 - - - -7 - - - - -31 - - - - -33 - - - - - -2 - - - -95 - - - - -17 - - - - -2 - - - - - -3 - - - -5 - - - - -10 - - - - -50 - - - + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + + + 1 + + + 7 + + + 31 + + + 33 + + + + + 2 + + + 95 + + + 17 + + + 2 + + + + + 3 + + + 5 + + + 10 + + + 50 + +
-The smallest possible array is a 1 x 2 or 2 x 1 array with two adjacent cells. -What is an array formula? -A formula in which the individual values in a cell range are evaluated is referred to as an array formula. The difference between an array formula and other formulas is that the array formula deals with several values simultaneously instead of just one. -Not only can an array formula process several values, but it can also return several values. The results of an array formula is also an array. -To multiply the values in the individual cells by 10 in the above array, you do not need to apply a formula to each individual cell or value. Instead you just need to use a single array formula. Select a range of 3 x 3 cells on another part of the spreadsheet, enter the formula =10*A1:C3 and confirm this entry using the key combination CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter. The result is a 3 x 3 array in which the individual values in the cell range (A1:C3) are multiplied by a factor of 10. -In addition to multiplication, you can also use other operators on the reference range (an array). With $[officename] Calc, you can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide (/), use exponents (^), concatenation (&) and comparisons (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=). The operators can be used on each individual value in the cell range and return the result as an array if the array formula was entered. -Comparison operators in an array formula treat empty cells in the same way as in a normal formula, that is, either as zero or as an empty string. For example, if cells A1 and A2 are empty the array formulas {=A1:A2=""} and {=A1:A2=0} will both return a 1 column 2 row array of cells containing TRUE. -When do you use array formulas? -Use array formulas if you have to repeat calculations using different values. If you decide to change the calculation method later, you only have to update the array formula. To add an array formula, select the entire array range and then make the required change to the array formula. -Array formulas are also a space saving option when several values must be calculated, since they are not very memory-intensive. In addition, arrays are an essential tool for carrying out complex calculations, because you can have several cell ranges included in your calculations. $[officename] has different math functions for arrays, such as the MMULT function for multiplying two arrays or the SUMPRODUCT function for calculating the scalar products of two arrays. -Using Array Formulas in $[officename] Calc -You can also create a "normal" formula in which the reference range, such as parameters, indicate an array formula. The result is obtained from the intersection of the reference range and the rows or columns in which the formula is found. If there is no intersection or if the range at the intersection covers several rows or columns, a #VALUE! error message appears. The following example illustrates this concept: -Creating Array Formulas +The smallest possible array is a 1 x 2 or 2 x 1 array with two adjacent cells. + +What is an array formula? +A formula in which the individual values in a cell range are evaluated is referred to as an array formula. The difference between an array formula and other formulas is that the array formula deals with several values simultaneously instead of just one. +Not only can an array formula process several values, but it can also return several values. The results of an array formula is also an array. +To multiply the values in the individual cells by 10 in the above array, you do not need to apply a formula to each individual cell or value. Instead you just need to use a single array formula. Select a range of 3 x 3 cells on another part of the spreadsheet, enter the formula =10*A1:C3 and confirm this entry using the key combination Command +Ctrl+Shift+Enter. The result is a 3 x 3 array in which the individual values in the cell range (A1:C3) are multiplied by a factor of 10. +In addition to multiplication, you can also use other operators on the reference range (an array). With $[officename] Calc, you can add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*), divide (/), use exponents (^), concatenation (&) and comparisons (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=). The operators can be used on each individual value in the cell range and return the result as an array if the array formula was entered. +Comparison operators in an array formula treat empty cells in the same way as in a normal formula, that is, either as zero or as an empty string. For example, if cells A1 and A2 are empty the array formulas {=A1:A2=""} and {=A1:A2=0} will both return a 1 column 2 row array of cells containing TRUE. + +When do you use array formulas? +Use array formulas if you have to repeat calculations using different values. If you decide to change the calculation method later, you only have to update the array formula. To add an array formula, select the entire array range and then make the required change to the array formula. +Array formulas are also a space saving option when several values must be calculated, since they are not very memory-intensive. In addition, arrays are an essential tool for carrying out complex calculations, because you can have several cell ranges included in your calculations. $[officename] has different math functions for arrays, such as the MMULT function for multiplying two arrays or the SUMPRODUCT function for calculating the scalar products of two arrays. + +Using Array Formulas in $[officename] Calc +You can also create a "normal" formula in which the reference range, such as parameters, indicate an array formula. The result is obtained from the intersection of the reference range and the rows or columns in which the formula is found. If there is no intersection or if the range at the intersection covers several rows or columns, a #VALUE! error message appears. The following example illustrates this concept: + +Creating Array Formulas +
-If you create an array formula using the Function Wizard, you must mark the Array check box each time so that the results are returned in an array. Otherwise, only the value in the upper-left cell of the array being calculated is returned. -If you enter the array formula directly into the cell, you must use the key combination Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter instead of the Enter key. Only then does the formula become an array formula. -Array formulas appear in braces in $[officename] Calc. You cannot create array formulas by manually entering the braces. +If you create an array formula using the Function Wizard, you must mark the Array check box each time so that the results are returned in an array. Otherwise, only the value in the upper-left cell of the array being calculated is returned. +If you enter the array formula directly into the cell, you must use the key combination Shift+Command +Ctrl+Enter instead of the Enter key. Only then does the formula become an array formula. +Array formulas appear in braces in $[officename] Calc. You cannot create array formulas by manually entering the braces.
-The cells in a results array are automatically protected against changes. However, you can edit or copy the array formula by selecting the entire array cell range. -Using Inline Array Constants in Formulas -Calc supports inline matrix/array constants in formulas. An inline array is surrounded by curly braces '{' and '}'. Elements can be each a number (including negatives), a logical constant (TRUE, FALSE), or a literal string. Non-constant expressions are not allowed. Arrays can be entered with one or more rows, and one or more columns. All rows must consist of the same number of elements, all columns must consist of the same number of elements. -The column separator (separating elements in one row) and the row separator are language and locale dependent. But in this help content, the ';' semicolon and '|' pipe symbol are used to indicate the column and row separators, respectively. For example, in the English locale, the ',' comma is used as the column separator, while the ';' semicolon is used as the row separator. -Arrays can not be nested. - -Examples: - -={1;2;3} -An array with one row consisting of the three numbers 1, 2, and 3. -To enter this array constant, you select three cells in a row, then you type the formula ={1;2;3} using the curly braces and the semicolons, then press CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter. -={1;2;3|4;5;6} -An array with two rows and three values in each row. -={0;1;2|FALSE;TRUE;"two"} -A mixed data array. -=SIN({1;2;3}) -Entered as a matrix formula, delivers the result of three SIN calculations with the arguments 1, 2, and 3. -Editing Array Formulas +The cells in a results array are automatically protected against changes. However, you can edit or copy the array formula by selecting the entire array cell range. + +Using Inline Array Constants in Formulas +Calc supports inline matrix/array constants in formulas. An inline array is surrounded by curly braces '{' and '}'. Elements can be each a number (including negatives), a logical constant (TRUE, FALSE), or a literal string. Non-constant expressions are not allowed. Arrays can be entered with one or more rows, and one or more columns. All rows must consist of the same number of elements, all columns must consist of the same number of elements. +The column separator (separating elements in one row) and the row separator are language and locale dependent. But in this help content, the ';' semicolon and '|' pipe symbol are used to indicate the column and row separators, respectively. For example, in the English locale, the ',' comma is used as the column separator, while the ';' semicolon is used as the row separator. +Arrays can not be nested. +Examples: +={1;2;3} +An array with one row consisting of the three numbers 1, 2, and 3. +To enter this array constant, you select three cells in a row, then you type the formula ={1;2;3} using the curly braces and the semicolons, then press Command +Ctrl+Shift+Enter. +={1;2;3|4;5;6} +An array with two rows and three values in each row. +={0;1;2|FALSE;TRUE;"two"} +A mixed data array. +=SIN({1;2;3}) +Entered as a matrix formula, delivers the result of three SIN calculations with the arguments 1, 2, and 3. + +Editing Array Formulas + - -Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. To select the whole array, position the cell cursor inside the array range, then press CommandCtrl+/, where / is the Division key on the numeric keypad. - - -Either press F2 or position the cursor in the input line. Both of these actions let you edit the formula. - - -After you have made changes, press CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter. - + + Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. To select the whole array, position the cell cursor inside the array range, then press Command +Ctrl+/, where / is the Division key on the numeric keypad. + + + Either press F2 or position the cursor in the input line. Both of these actions let you edit the formula. + + + After you have made changes, press Command +Ctrl+Shift+Enter. + -You can format the separate parts of an array. For example, you can change the font color. Select a cell range and then change the attribute you want. -Copying Array Formulas +You can format the separate parts of an array. For example, you can change the font color. Select a cell range and then change the attribute you want. + +Copying Array Formulas + - -Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. - - -Either press F2 or position the cursor in the input line. - - -Copy the formula into the input line by pressing CommandCtrl+C. - - -Select a range of cells where you want to insert the array formula and either press F2 or position the cursor in the input line. - - -Paste the formula by pressing CommandCtrl+V in the selected space and confirm it by pressing CommandCtrl+Shift+Enter. The selected range now contains the array formula. - + + Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. + + + Either press F2 or position the cursor in the input line. + + + Copy the formula into the input line by pressing Command +Ctrl+C. + + + Select a range of cells where you want to insert the array formula and either press F2 or position the cursor in the input line. + + + Paste the formula by pressing Command +Ctrl+V in the selected space and confirm it by pressing Command +Ctrl+Shift+Enter. The selected range now contains the array formula. + -Adjusting an Array Range -If you want to edit the output array, do the following: + +Adjusting an Array Range +If you want to edit the output array, do the following: + - -Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. - - -Below the selection, to the right, you will see a small icon with which you can zoom in or out on the range using your mouse. - + + Select the cell range or array containing the array formula. + + + Below the selection, to the right, you will see a small icon with which you can zoom in or out on the range using your mouse. + -When you adjust the array range, the array formula will not automatically be adjusted. You are only changing the range in which the result will appear. -By holding down the CommandCtrl key, you can create a copy of the array formula in the given range. -Conditional Array Calculations -A conditional array calculation is an array or matrix formula that includes an IF() or CHOOSE() function. The condition argument in the formula is an area reference or a matrix result. -In the following example, the >0 test of the {=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} formula is applied to each cell in the range A1:A3 and the result is copied to the corresponding cell. +When you adjust the array range, the array formula will not automatically be adjusted. You are only changing the range in which the result will appear. +By holding down the Command +Ctrl key, you can create a copy of the array formula in the given range. + +Conditional Array Calculations +A conditional array calculation is an array or matrix formula that includes an IF() or CHOOSE() function. The condition argument in the formula is an area reference or a matrix result. +In the following example, the >0 test of the {=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} formula is applied to each cell in the range A1:A3 and the result is copied to the corresponding cell. + - - - - -A - - -B (formula) - - -B (result) - - - - -1 - - -1 - - -{=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} - - -yes - - - - -2 - - -0 - - -{=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} - - -no - - - - -3 - - -1 - - -{=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} - - -yes - - + + + + + A + + + B (formula) + + + B (result) + + + + + 1 + + + 1 + + + {=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} + + + yes + + + + + 2 + + + 0 + + + {=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} + + + no + + + + + 3 + + + 1 + + + {=IF(A1:A3>0;"yes";"no")} + + + yes + +
-The following functions provide forced array handling: CORREL, COVAR, FORECAST, FTEST, INTERCEPT, MDETERM, MINVERSE, MMULT, MODE, PEARSON, PROB, RSQ, SLOPE, STEYX, SUMPRODUCT, SUMX2MY2, SUMX2PY2, SUMXMY2, TTEST. If you use area references as arguments when you call one of these functions, the functions behave as array functions. The following table provides an example of forced array handling: +The following functions provide forced array handling: CORREL, COVAR, FORECAST, FTEST, INTERCEPT, MDETERM, MINVERSE, MMULT, MODE, PEARSON, PROB, RSQ, SLOPE, STEYX, SUMPRODUCT, SUMX2MY2, SUMX2PY2, SUMXMY2, TTEST. If you use area references as arguments when you call one of these functions, the functions behave as array functions. The following table provides an example of forced array handling: + - - - - -A - - -B (formula) - - -B (result) - - -C (forced array formula) - - -C (result) - - - - -1 - - -1 - - -=A1:A2+1 - - -2 - - -=SUMPRODUCT(A1:A2+1) - - -5 - - - - -2 - - -2 - - -=A1:A2+1 - - -3 - - -=SUMPRODUCT(A1:A2+1) - - -5 - - - - -3 - - - - -=A1:A2+1 - - -#VALUE! - - -=SUMPRODUCT(A1:A2+1) - - -5 - - + + + + + A + + + B (formula) + + + B (result) + + + C (forced array formula) + + + C (result) + + + + + 1 + + + 1 + + + =A1:A2+1 + + + 2 + + + =SUMPRODUCT(A1:A2+1) + + + 5 + + + + + 2 + + + 2 + + + =A1:A2+1 + + + 3 + + + =SUMPRODUCT(A1:A2+1) + + + 5 + + + + + 3 + + + + + =A1:A2+1 + + + #VALUE! + + + =SUMPRODUCT(A1:A2+1) + + + 5 + +
+
-MUNIT function + + MUNIT function + -MUNIT -Returns the unitary square array of a certain size. The unitary array is a square array where the main diagonal elements equal 1 and all other array elements are equal to 0. -Syntax -MUNIT(Dimensions) - -Dimensions refers to the size of the array unit. -You can find a general introduction to Array functions at the top of this page. -Example -Select a square range within the spreadsheet, for example, from A1 to E5. -Without deselecting the range, select the MUNIT function. Mark the Array check box. Enter the desired dimensions for the array unit, in this case 5, and click OK. -You can also enter the =Munit(5) formula in the last cell of the selected range (E5), and press Shift+Command+EnterShift+Ctrl+Enter. -You now see a unit array with a range of A1:E5. - - - + +MUNIT +Returns the unitary square array of a certain size. The unitary array is a square array where the main diagonal elements equal 1 and all other array elements are equal to 0. + +Syntax +MUNIT(Dimensions) +Dimensions refers to the size of the array unit. +You can find a general introduction to Array functions at the top of this page. + +Example +Select a square range within the spreadsheet, for example, from A1 to E5. +Without deselecting the range, select the MUNIT function. Mark the Array check box. Enter the desired dimensions for the array unit, in this case 5, and click OK. +You can also enter the =Munit(5) formula in the last cell of the selected range (E5), and press Shift+Command+Enter +Shift+Ctrl+Enter. +You now see a unit array with a range of A1:E5. +
+
-FREQUENCY function + + FREQUENCY function + -FREQUENCY -Indicates the frequency distribution in a one-column-array. The function counts the number of values in the Data array that are within the values given by the Classes array. -Syntax -FREQUENCY(Data; Classes) - -Data represents the reference to the values to be counted. - -Classes represents the array of the limit values. -You can find a general introduction to Array functions at the top of this page. -Example -In the following table, column A lists unsorted measurement values. Column B contains the upper limit you entered for the classes into which you want to divide the data in column A. According to the limit entered in B1, the FREQUENCY function returns the number of measured values less than or equal to 5. As the limit in B2 is 10, the FREQUENCY function returns the second result as the number of measured values that are greater than 5 and less than or equal to 10. The text you entered in B6, ">25", is only for reference purposes.i77461: replace old text: As the limit in B2 is 10, the FREQUENCY function returns the second result as the number of measured values that are greater than 5 or greater than or equal to 10.UFI: replace table by picture + +FREQUENCY +Indicates the frequency distribution in a one-column-array. The function counts the number of values in the Data array that are within the values given by the Classes array. + +Syntax +FREQUENCY(Data; Classes) +Data represents the reference to the values to be counted. +Classes represents the array of the limit values. +You can find a general introduction to Array functions at the top of this page. + +Example +In the following table, column A lists unsorted measurement values. Column B contains the upper limit you entered for the classes into which you want to divide the data in column A. According to the limit entered in B1, the FREQUENCY function returns the number of measured values less than or equal to 5. As the limit in B2 is 10, the FREQUENCY function returns the second result as the number of measured values that are greater than 5 and less than or equal to 10. The text you entered in B6, ">25", is only for reference purposes.i77461: replace old text: As the limit in B2 is 10, the FREQUENCY function returns the second result as the number of measured values that are greater than 5 or greater than or equal to 10.UFI: replace table by picture + - - - - - -A - - - - -B - - - - -C - - - - - - -1 - - - -12 - - -5 - - -1 - - - - - -2 - - - -8 - - -10 - - -3 - - - - - -3 - - - -24 - - -15 - - -2 - - - - - -4 - - - -11 - - -20 - - -3 - - - - - -5 - - - -5 - - -25 - - -1 - - - - - -6 - - - -20 - - ->25 - - -1 - - - - - -7 - - - -16 - - - - - - - - - -8 - - - -9 - - - - - - - - - -9 - - - -7 - - - - - - - - - -10 - - - -16 - - - - - - - - - -11 - - - -33 - - - - - - + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + + + 1 + + + 12 + + + 5 + + + 1 + + + + + 2 + + + 8 + + + 10 + + + 3 + + + + + 3 + + + 24 + + + 15 + + + 2 + + + + + 4 + + + 11 + + + 20 + + + 3 + + + + + 5 + + + 5 + + + 25 + + + 1 + + + + + 6 + + + 20 + + + >25 + + + 1 + + + + + 7 + + + 16 + + + + + + + + + 8 + + + 9 + + + + + + + + + 9 + + + 7 + + + + + + + + + 10 + + + 16 + + + + + + + + + 11 + + + 33 + + + + + +
-Select a single column range in which to enter the frequency according to the class limits. You must select one field more than the class ceiling. In this example, select the range C1:C6. Call up the FREQUENCY function in the Function Wizard. Select the Data range in (A1:A11), and then the Classes range in which you entered the class limits (B1:B6). Select the Array check box and click OK. You will see the frequency count in the range C1:C6. - - - +Select a single column range in which to enter the frequency according to the class limits. You must select one field more than the class ceiling. In this example, select the range C1:C6. Call up the FREQUENCY function in the Function Wizard. Select the Data range in (A1:A11), and then the Classes range in which you entered the class limits (B1:B6). Select the Array check box and click OK. You will see the frequency count in the range C1:C6. +
+
-MDETERM function -determinants + + MDETERM function + determinants + -MDETERM -Returns the array determinant of an array. This function returns a value in the current cell; it is not necessary to define a range for the results. -Syntax -MDETERM(Array) - -Array represents a square array in which the determinants are defined. -You can find a general introduction to using Array functions on top of this page. - - - + +MDETERM +Returns the array determinant of an array. This function returns a value in the current cell; it is not necessary to define a range for the results. + +Syntax +MDETERM(Array) +Array represents a square array in which the determinants are defined. +You can find a general introduction to using Array functions on top of this page. +
+
-MINVERSE function -inverse arrays + + MINVERSE function + inverse arrays + -MINVERSE -Returns the inverse array. -Syntax -MINVERSE(Array) - -Array represents a square array that is to be inverted. - - - -Example -Select a square range and select MINVERSE. Select the output array, select the Array field and click OK. + +MINVERSE +Returns the inverse array. + +Syntax +MINVERSE(Array) +Array represents a square array that is to be inverted. + + +Example +Select a square range and select MINVERSE. Select the output array, select the Array field and click OK.
+
-MMULT function + + MMULT function + -MMULT -Calculates the array product of two arrays. The number of columns for array 1 must match the number of rows for array 2. The square array has an equal number of rows and columns. -Syntax -MMULT(Array; Array) - -Array at first place represents the first array used in the array product. - -Array at second place represents the second array with the same number of rows. - - - -Example -Select a square range. Choose the MMULT function. Select the first Array, then select the second Array. Using Function Wizard, mark the Array check box. Click OK. The output array will appear in the first selected range. + +MMULT +Calculates the array product of two arrays. The number of columns for array 1 must match the number of rows for array 2. The square array has an equal number of rows and columns. + +Syntax +MMULT(Array; Array) +Array at first place represents the first array used in the array product. +Array at second place represents the second array with the same number of rows. + + +Example +Select a square range. Choose the MMULT function. Select the first Array, then select the second Array. Using Function Wizard, mark the Array check box. Click OK. The output array will appear in the first selected range.
+
-TRANSPOSE function + + TRANSPOSE function + -TRANSPOSE -Transposes the rows and columns of an array. -Syntax -TRANSPOSE(Array) - -Array represents the array in the spreadsheet that is to be transposed. - - - -Example -In the spreadsheet, select the range in which the transposed array can appear. If the original array has n rows and m columns, your selected range must have at least m rows and n columns. Then enter the formula directly, select the original array and press Shift+Command+EnterShift+Ctrl+Enter. Or, if you are using the Function Wizard, mark the Array check box. The transposed array appears in the selected target range and is protected automatically against changes. + +TRANSPOSE +Transposes the rows and columns of an array. + +Syntax +TRANSPOSE(Array) +Array represents the array in the spreadsheet that is to be transposed. + + +Example +In the spreadsheet, select the range in which the transposed array can appear. If the original array has n rows and m columns, your selected range must have at least m rows and n columns. Then enter the formula directly, select the original array and press Shift+Command+Enter +Shift+Ctrl+Enter. Or, if you are using the Function Wizard, mark the Array check box. The transposed array appears in the selected target range and is protected automatically against changes.
+
-LINEST function + + LINEST function + -LINEST -Returns a table of statistics for a straight line that best fits a data set.changed based on http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Documentation/How_Tos/Calc:_LINEST_function (issue 76142) -Syntax -LINEST(data_Y; data_X; linearType; stats) - -data_Y is a single row or column range specifying the y coordinates in a set of data points. - -data_X is a corresponding single row or column range specifying the x coordinates. If data_X is omitted it defaults to 1, 2, 3, ..., n. If there is more than one set of variables data_X may be a range with corresponding multiple rows or columns. -LINEST finds a straight line y = a + bx that best fits the data, using linear regression (the "least squares" method). With more than one set of variables the straight line is of the form y = a + b1x1 + b2x2 ... + bnxn. - iflinearType is FALSE the straight line found is forced to pass through the origin (the constant a is zero; y = bx). If omitted, linearType defaults to TRUE (the line is not forced through the origin). -ifstats is omitted or FALSE only the top line of the statistics table is returned. If TRUE the entire table is returned. -LINEST returns a table (array) of statistics as below and must be entered as an array formula (for example by using CommandCtrl+Shift+Return rather than just Return). - - - - - - -Example -This function returns an array and is handled in the same way as the other array functions. Select a range for the answers and then the function. Select data_Y. If you want, you can enter other parameters. Select Array and click OK. -The results returned by the system (if stats = 0), will at least show the slope of the regression line and its intersection with the Y axis. If stats does not equal 0, other results are to be displayed. -Other LINEST Results: -Examine the following examples: + +LINEST +Returns a table of statistics for a straight line that best fits a data set.changed based on http://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Documentation/How_Tos/Calc:_LINEST_function (issue 76142) + +Syntax +LINEST(data_Y; data_X; linearType; stats) +data_Y is a single row or column range specifying the y coordinates in a set of data points. +data_X is a corresponding single row or column range specifying the x coordinates. If data_X is omitted it defaults to 1, 2, 3, ..., n. If there is more than one set of variables data_X may be a range with corresponding multiple rows or columns. +LINEST finds a straight line y = a + bx that best fits the data, using linear regression (the "least squares" method). With more than one set of variables the straight line is of the form y = a + b1x1 + b2x2 ... + bnxn. +iflinearType is FALSE the straight line found is forced to pass through the origin (the constant a is zero; y = bx). If omitted, linearType defaults to TRUE (the line is not forced through the origin). +ifstats is omitted or FALSE only the top line of the statistics table is returned. If TRUE the entire table is returned. +LINEST returns a table (array) of statistics as below and must be entered as an array formula (for example by using Command +Ctrl+Shift+Return rather than just Return). + + + +Example +This function returns an array and is handled in the same way as the other array functions. Select a range for the answers and then the function. Select data_Y. If you want, you can enter other parameters. Select Array and click OK. +The results returned by the system (if stats = 0), will at least show the slope of the regression line and its intersection with the Y axis. If stats does not equal 0, other results are to be displayed. + +Other LINEST Results: +Examine the following examples: + - - - - -A - - -B - - -C - - -D - - -E - - -F - - -G - - - - - -1 - - - - -x1 - - - - -x2 - - - - -y - - - - - - -LIN -EST value - - - - - - - - - - -2 - - - - -4 - - - - -7 - - - - -100 - - - - - - -4,17 - - - --3,48 - - - - -82,33 - - - - - - -3 - - - - -5 - - - - -9 - - - - -105 - - - - - - -5,46 - - - - -10,96 - - - - -9,35 - - - - - - -4 - - - - -6 - - - - -11 - - - - -104 - - - - - - -0,87 - - - - -5,06 - - - - -#NA - - - - - - -5 - - - - -7 - - - - -12 - - - - -108 - - - - - - -13,21 - - - - -4 - - - - -#NA - - - - - - -6 - - - - -8 - - - - -15 - - - - -111 - - - - - - -675,45 - - - - -102,26 - - - - -#NA - - - - - - -7 - - - - -9 - - - - -17 - - - - -120 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8 - - - - -10 - - - - -19 - - - - -133 - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + E + + + F + + + G + + + + + 1 + + + x1 + + + x2 + + + y + + + + + LINEST value + + + + + + + + + 2 + + + 4 + + + 7 + + + 100 + + + + + 4,17 + + + -3,48 + + + 82,33 + + + + + 3 + + + 5 + + + 9 + + + 105 + + + + + 5,46 + + + 10,96 + + + 9,35 + + + + + 4 + + + 6 + + + 11 + + + 104 + + + + + 0,87 + + + 5,06 + + + #NA + + + + + 5 + + + 7 + + + 12 + + + 108 + + + + + 13,21 + + + 4 + + + #NA + + + + + 6 + + + 8 + + + 15 + + + 111 + + + + + 675,45 + + + 102,26 + + + #NA + + + + + 7 + + + 9 + + + 17 + + + 120 + + + + + + + + + + + + + 8 + + + 10 + + + 19 + + + 133 + + + + + + + + + +
-Column A contains several X1 values, column B several X2 values and column C the Y values. You have already entered these values in your spreadsheet. You have now set up E2:G6 in the spreadsheet and activated the Function Wizard. For the LINEST function to work, you must have marked the Array check box in the Function Wizard. Next, select the following values in the spreadsheet (or enter them using the keyboard): - -data_Y is C2:C8 - -data_X is A2:B8 - -linearType and stats are both set to 1. -As soon as you click OK, $[officename] Calc will fill the above example with the LINEST values as shown in the example. -The formula in the Formula Bar corresponds to each cell of the LINEST array {=LINEST(C2:C8;A2:B8;1;1)} - - -This represents the calculated LINEST values: - -slopes, see also regression lines -regression lines;LINEST function -mw made "regression lines" a two level entry -E2 and F2: Slope m of the regression line y=b+m*x for the x1 and x2 values. The values are given in reverse order; that is, the slope for x2 in E2 and the slope for x1 in F2. -G2: Intersection b with the y axis. -standard errors;array functions -MW changed "standard errors" -E3 and F3: The standard error of the slope value. -G3: The standard error of the intercept -RSQ calculations +Column A contains several X1 values, column B several X2 values and column C the Y values. You have already entered these values in your spreadsheet. You have now set up E2:G6 in the spreadsheet and activated the Function Wizard. For the LINEST function to work, you must have marked the Array check box in the Function Wizard. Next, select the following values in the spreadsheet (or enter them using the keyboard): +data_Y is C2:C8 +data_X is A2:B8 +linearType and stats are both set to 1. +As soon as you click OK, $[officename] Calc will fill the above example with the LINEST values as shown in the example. +The formula in the Formula Bar corresponds to each cell of the LINEST array {=LINEST(C2:C8;A2:B8;1;1)} +This represents the calculated LINEST values: + + slopes, see also regression lines + regression lines;LINEST function + +mw made "regression lines" a two level entry +E2 and F2: Slope m of the regression line y=b+m*x for the x1 and x2 values. The values are given in reverse order; that is, the slope for x2 in E2 and the slope for x1 in F2. +G2: Intersection b with the y axis. + + standard errors;array functions + +MW changed "standard errors" +E3 and F3: The standard error of the slope value. +G3: The standard error of the intercept + + RSQ calculations -E4: RSQ -F4: The standard error of the regression calculated for the Y value. -E5: The F value from the variance analysis. -F5: The degrees of freedom from the variance analysis. -E6: The sum of the squared deviation of the estimated Y values from their linear mean. -F6: The sum of the squared deviation of the estimated Y value from the given Y values. - - - + +E4: RSQ +F4: The standard error of the regression calculated for the Y value. +E5: The F value from the variance analysis. +F5: The degrees of freedom from the variance analysis. +E6: The sum of the squared deviation of the estimated Y values from their linear mean. +F6: The sum of the squared deviation of the estimated Y value from the given Y values. +
+
-LOGEST function + + LOGEST function + -LOGEST -This function calculates the adjustment of the entered data as an exponential regression curve (y=b*m^x).UFI: see http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?kbid=828528&product=xl2003 -for bug #i31051# -Syntax -LOGEST(DataY; DataX; FunctionType; Stats) - -DataY represents the Y Data array. - -DataX (optional) represents the X Data array. - -FunctionType (optional). If Function_Type = 0, functions in the form y = m^x will be calculated. Otherwise, y = b*m^x functions will be calculated. - -Stats (optional). If Stats=0, only the regression coefficient is calculated. - - - - - - -Example -See LINEST. However, no square sum will be returned. + +LOGEST +This function calculates the adjustment of the entered data as an exponential regression curve (y=b*m^x).UFI: see http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?kbid=828528&product=xl2003 for bug #i31051# + +Syntax +LOGEST(DataY; DataX; FunctionType; Stats) +DataY represents the Y Data array. +DataX (optional) represents the X Data array. +FunctionType (optional). If Function_Type = 0, functions in the form y = m^x will be calculated. Otherwise, y = b*m^x functions will be calculated. +Stats (optional). If Stats=0, only the regression coefficient is calculated. + + + +Example +See LINEST. However, no square sum will be returned.
+
-SUMPRODUCT function -scalar products -dot products -inner products + + SUMPRODUCT function + scalar products + dot products + inner products + -SUMPRODUCT -Multiplies corresponding elements in the given arrays, and returns the sum of those products. -Syntax -SUMPRODUCT(Array1; Array2...Array30) - -Array1, Array2...Array30 represent arrays whose corresponding elements are to be multiplied. -At least one array must be part of the argument list. If only one array is given, all array elements are summed. -Example + +SUMPRODUCT +Multiplies corresponding elements in the given arrays, and returns the sum of those products. + +Syntax +SUMPRODUCT(Array1; Array2...Array30) +Array1, Array2...Array30 represent arrays whose corresponding elements are to be multiplied. +At least one array must be part of the argument list. If only one array is given, all array elements are summed. + +Example + - - - - -A - - -B - - -C - - -D - - - - -1 - - - -2 - - - - -3 - - - - -4 - - - - -5 - - - - - -2 - - - -6 - - - - -7 - - - - -8 - - - - -9 - - - - - -3 - - - -10 - - - - -11 - - - - -12 - - - - -13 - - - + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + D + + + + + 1 + + + 2 + + + 3 + + + 4 + + + 5 + + + + + 2 + + + 6 + + + 7 + + + 8 + + + 9 + + + + + 3 + + + 10 + + + 11 + + + 12 + + + 13 + +
- -=SUMPRODUCT(A1:B3;C1:D3) returns 397. -Calculation: A1*C1 + B1*D1 + A2*C2 + B2*D2 + A3*C3 + B3*D3 -You can use SUMPRODUCT to calculate the scalar product of two vectors. -SUMPRODUCT returns a single number, it is not necessary to enter the function as an array function. - - - +=SUMPRODUCT(A1:B3;C1:D3) returns 397. +Calculation: A1*C1 + B1*D1 + A2*C2 + B2*D2 + A3*C3 + B3*D3 +You can use SUMPRODUCT to calculate the scalar product of two vectors. +SUMPRODUCT returns a single number, it is not necessary to enter the function as an array function. +
+
-SUMX2MY2 function + + SUMX2MY2 function + -SUMX2MY2 -Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays. -Syntax -SUMX2MY2(ArrayX; ArrayY) - -ArrayX represents the first array whose elements are to be squared and added. - -ArrayY represents the second array whose elements are to be squared and subtracted. - - - + +SUMX2MY2 +Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays. + +Syntax +SUMX2MY2(ArrayX; ArrayY) +ArrayX represents the first array whose elements are to be squared and added. +ArrayY represents the second array whose elements are to be squared and subtracted. +
+
-SUMX2PY2 function + + SUMX2PY2 function + -SUMX2PY2 -Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays. -Syntax -SUMX2PY2(ArrayX; ArrayY) - -ArrayX represents the first array whose elements are to be squared and added. - -ArrayY represents the second array, whose elements are to be squared and added. - - - + +SUMX2PY2 +Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays. + +Syntax +SUMX2PY2(ArrayX; ArrayY) +ArrayX represents the first array whose elements are to be squared and added. +ArrayY represents the second array, whose elements are to be squared and added. +
+
-SUMXMY2 function + + SUMXMY2 function + -SUMXMY2 -Adds the squares of the variance between corresponding values in two arrays. -Syntax -SUMXMY2(ArrayX; ArrayY) - -ArrayX represents the first array whose elements are to be subtracted and squared. - -ArrayY represents the second array, whose elements are to be subtracted and squared. - - - + +SUMXMY2 +Adds the squares of the variance between corresponding values in two arrays. + +Syntax +SUMXMY2(ArrayX; ArrayY) +ArrayX represents the first array whose elements are to be subtracted and squared. +ArrayY represents the second array, whose elements are to be subtracted and squared. +
+
-TREND function + + TREND function + -TREND -Returns values along a linear trend. -Syntax -TREND(DataY; DataX; NewDataX; LinearType) - -DataY represents the Y Data array. - -DataX (optional) represents the X Data array. - -NewDataX (optional) represents the array of the X data, which are used for recalculating values. - -LinearType(Optional). If LinearType = 0, then lines will be calculated through the zero point. Otherwise, offset lines will also be calculated. The default is LinearType <> 0. - - - - - - -Example -Select a spreadsheet range in which the trend data will appear. Select the function. Enter the output data or select it with the mouse. Mark the Array field. click OK. The trend data calculated from the output data is displayed. + +TREND +Returns values along a linear trend. + +Syntax +TREND(DataY; DataX; NewDataX; LinearType) +DataY represents the Y Data array. +DataX (optional) represents the X Data array. +NewDataX (optional) represents the array of the X data, which are used for recalculating values. +LinearType(Optional). If LinearType = 0, then lines will be calculated through the zero point. Otherwise, offset lines will also be calculated. The default is LinearType <> 0. + + + +Example +Select a spreadsheet range in which the trend data will appear. Select the function. Enter the output data or select it with the mouse. Mark the Array field. click OK. The trend data calculated from the output data is displayed.
+
-GROWTH function -exponential trends in arrays + + GROWTH function + exponential trends in arrays + -GROWTH -Calculates the points of an exponential trend in an array. -Syntax -GROWTH(DataY; DataX; NewDataX; FunctionType) - -DataY represents the Y Data array. - -DataX (optional) represents the X Data array. - -NewDataX (optional) represents the X data array, in which the values are recalculated. - -FunctionType(optional). If FunctionType = 0, functions in the form y = m^x will be calculated. Otherwise, y = b*m^x functions will be calculated. - - - - - - -Example -This function returns an array and is handled in the same way as the other array functions. Select a range where you want the answers to appear and select the function. Select DataY. Enter any other parameters, mark Array and click OK. + +GROWTH +Calculates the points of an exponential trend in an array. + +Syntax +GROWTH(DataY; DataX; NewDataX; FunctionType) +DataY represents the Y Data array. +DataX (optional) represents the X Data array. +NewDataX (optional) represents the X data array, in which the values are recalculated. +FunctionType(optional). If FunctionType = 0, functions in the form y = m^x will be calculated. Otherwise, y = b*m^x functions will be calculated. + + + +Example +This function returns an array and is handled in the same way as the other array functions. Select a range where you want the answers to appear and select the function. Select DataY. Enter any other parameters, mark Array and click OK.
+
- + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp index 32e657cee8..e016c2575c 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - -Financial Functions Part Three -/text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp - + + Financial Functions Part Three + /text/scalc/01/04060118.xhp + + -Financial Functions Part Three + + +Financial Functions Part Three +
-ODDFPRICE function -prices;securities with irregular first interest date -mw added one entry + + ODDFPRICE function + prices;securities with irregular first interest date + +mw added one entry -ODDFPRICE -Calculates the price per 100 currency units par value of a security, if the first interest date falls irregularly. -Syntax -ODDFPRICE(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; FirstCoupon; Rate; Yield; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Issue is the date of issue of the security. - -FirstCoupon is the first interest date of the security. - -Rate is the annual rate of interest. - -Yield is the annual yield of the security. - -Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. - -Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +ODDFPRICE +Calculates the price per 100 currency units par value of a security, if the first interest date falls irregularly. + +Syntax +ODDFPRICE(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; FirstCoupon; Rate; Yield; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Issue is the date of issue of the security. +FirstCoupon is the first interest date of the security. +Rate is the annual rate of interest. +Yield is the annual yield of the security. +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4).
+
-ODDFYIELD function + + ODDFYIELD function + -ODDFYIELD -Calculates the yield of a security if the first interest date falls irregularly. -Syntax -ODDFYIELD(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; FirstCoupon; Rate; Price; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Issue is the date of issue of the security. - -FirstCoupon is the first interest period of the security. - -Rate is the annual rate of interest. - -Price is the price of the security. - -Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. - -Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +ODDFYIELD +Calculates the yield of a security if the first interest date falls irregularly. + +Syntax +ODDFYIELD(Settlement; Maturity; Issue; FirstCoupon; Rate; Price; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Issue is the date of issue of the security. +FirstCoupon is the first interest period of the security. +Rate is the annual rate of interest. +Price is the price of the security. +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4).
+
-ODDLPRICE function + + ODDLPRICE function + -ODDLPRICE -Calculates the price per 100 currency units par value of a security, if the last interest date falls irregularly. -Syntax -ODDLPRICE(Settlement; Maturity; LastInterest; Rate; Yield; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -LastInterest is the last interest date of the security. - -Rate is the annual rate of interest. - -Yield is the annual yield of the security. - -Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. - -Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +ODDLPRICE +Calculates the price per 100 currency units par value of a security, if the last interest date falls irregularly. + +Syntax +ODDLPRICE(Settlement; Maturity; LastInterest; Rate; Yield; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +LastInterest is the last interest date of the security. +Rate is the annual rate of interest. +Yield is the annual yield of the security. +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -Settlement date: February 7 1999, maturity date: June 15 1999, last interest: October 15 1998. Interest rate: 3.75 per cent, yield: 4.05 per cent, redemption value: 100 currency units, frequency of payments: half-yearly = 2, basis: = 0 -The price per 100 currency units per value of a security, which has an irregular last interest date, is calculated as follows: -=ODDLPRICE("1999-02-07";"1999-06-15";"1998-10-15"; 0.0375; 0.0405;100;2;0) returns 99.87829. + +Example +Settlement date: February 7 1999, maturity date: June 15 1999, last interest: October 15 1998. Interest rate: 3.75 per cent, yield: 4.05 per cent, redemption value: 100 currency units, frequency of payments: half-yearly = 2, basis: = 0 +The price per 100 currency units per value of a security, which has an irregular last interest date, is calculated as follows: +=ODDLPRICE("1999-02-07";"1999-06-15";"1998-10-15"; 0.0375; 0.0405;100;2;0) returns 99.87829.
+
-ODDLYIELD function + + ODDLYIELD function + -ODDLYIELD -Calculates the yield of a security if the last interest date falls irregularly. -Syntax -ODDLYIELD(Settlement; Maturity; LastInterest; Rate; Price; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -LastInterest is the last interest date of the security. - -Rate is the annual rate of interest. - -Price is the price of the security. - -Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. - -Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +ODDLYIELD +Calculates the yield of a security if the last interest date falls irregularly. + +Syntax +ODDLYIELD(Settlement; Maturity; LastInterest; Rate; Price; Redemption; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +LastInterest is the last interest date of the security. +Rate is the annual rate of interest. +Price is the price of the security. +Redemption is the redemption value per 100 currency units of par value. +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -Settlement date: April 20 1999, maturity date: June 15 1999, last interest: October 15 1998. Interest rate: 3.75 per cent, price: 99.875 currency units, redemption value: 100 currency units, frequency of payments: half-yearly = 2, basis: = 0 -The yield of the security, that has an irregular last interest date, is calculated as follows: -=ODDLYIELD("1999-04-20";"1999-06-15"; "1998-10-15"; 0.0375; 99.875; 100;2;0) returns 0.044873 or 4.4873%. + +Example +Settlement date: April 20 1999, maturity date: June 15 1999, last interest: October 15 1998. Interest rate: 3.75 per cent, price: 99.875 currency units, redemption value: 100 currency units, frequency of payments: half-yearly = 2, basis: = 0 +The yield of the security, that has an irregular last interest date, is calculated as follows: +=ODDLYIELD("1999-04-20";"1999-06-15"; "1998-10-15"; 0.0375; 99.875; 100;2;0) returns 0.044873 or 4.4873%.
+
-calculating;variable declining depreciations -depreciations;variable declining -VDB function + + calculating;variable declining depreciations + depreciations;variable declining + VDB function + -VDB -Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a variable declining balance method. -Syntax -VDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; S; End; Factor; Type) - -Cost is the initial value of an asset. - -Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. - -Life is the depreciation duration of the asset. - -S is the start of the depreciation. A must be entered in the same date unit as the duration. - -End is the end of the depreciation. - -Factor (optional) is the depreciation factor. Factor = 2 is double rate depreciation. - -Type is an optional parameter. Type = 1 means a switch to linear depreciation. In Type = 0 no switch is made. - - - -Example -What is the declining-balance double-rate depreciation for a period if the initial cost is 35,000 currency units and the value at the end of the depreciation is 7,500 currency units. The depreciation period is 3 years. The depreciation from the 10th to the 20th period is calculated. - -=VDB(35000;7500;36;10;20;2) = 8603.80 currency units. The depreciation during the period between the 10th and the 20th period is 8,603.80 currency units. + +VDB +Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a variable declining balance method. + +Syntax +VDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; S; End; Factor; Type) +Cost is the initial value of an asset. +Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. +Life is the depreciation duration of the asset. +S is the start of the depreciation. A must be entered in the same date unit as the duration. +End is the end of the depreciation. +Factor (optional) is the depreciation factor. Factor = 2 is double rate depreciation. +Type is an optional parameter. Type = 1 means a switch to linear depreciation. In Type = 0 no switch is made. + + +Example +What is the declining-balance double-rate depreciation for a period if the initial cost is 35,000 currency units and the value at the end of the depreciation is 7,500 currency units. The depreciation period is 3 years. The depreciation from the 10th to the 20th period is calculated. +=VDB(35000;7500;36;10;20;2) = 8603.80 currency units. The depreciation during the period between the 10th and the 20th period is 8,603.80 currency units.
+
-calculating;internal rates of return, irregular payments -internal rates of return;irregular payments -XIRR function -mw changed "calculating;..." and "internal rates of return" + + calculating;internal rates of return, irregular payments + internal rates of return;irregular payments + XIRR function + +mw changed "calculating;..." and "internal rates of return" -XIRR -Calculates the internal rate of return for a list of payments which take place on different dates. The calculation is based on a 365 days per year basis, ignoring leap years. -If the payments take place at regular intervals, use the IRR function. -Syntax -XIRR(Values; Dates; Guess) - -Values and Dates refer to a series of payments and the series of associated date values. The first pair of dates defines the start of the payment plan. All other date values must be later, but need not be in any order. The series of values must contain at least one negative and one positive value (receipts and deposits). - -Guess (optional) is a guess that can be input for the internal rate of return. The default is 10%. -Example -Calculation of the internal rate of return for the following five payments: + +XIRR +Calculates the internal rate of return for a list of payments which take place on different dates. The calculation is based on a 365 days per year basis, ignoring leap years. +If the payments take place at regular intervals, use the IRR function. + +Syntax +XIRR(Values; Dates; Guess) +Values and Dates refer to a series of payments and the series of associated date values. The first pair of dates defines the start of the payment plan. All other date values must be later, but need not be in any order. The series of values must contain at least one negative and one positive value (receipts and deposits). +Guess (optional) is a guess that can be input for the internal rate of return. The default is 10%. + +Example +Calculation of the internal rate of return for the following five payments: + - - - - -A - - -B - - -C - - - - -1 - - -2001-01-01 - - --10000 - - - - -Received - - - - - -2 - - -2001-01-02 - - - -2000 - - - - -Deposited - - - - - -3 - - -2001-03-15 - - -2500 - - - - - - -4 - - -2001-05-12 - - -5000 - - - - - - -5 - - -2001-08-10 - - -1000 - - - - + + + + + A + + + B + + + C + + + + + 1 + + + 2001-01-01 + + + -10000 + + + Received + + + + + 2 + + + 2001-01-02 + + + 2000 + + + Deposited + + + + + 3 + + + 2001-03-15 + + + 2500 + + + + + + + 4 + + + 2001-05-12 + + + 5000 + + + + + + + 5 + + + 2001-08-10 + + + 1000 + + + +
-=XIRR(B1:B5; A1:A5; 0.1) returns 0.1828. +=XIRR(B1:B5; A1:A5; 0.1) returns 0.1828.
+
-XNPV function + + XNPV function + -XNPV -Calculates the capital value (net present value)for a list of payments which take place on different dates. The calculation is based on a 365 days per year basis, ignoring leap years. -If the payments take place at regular intervals, use the NPV function. -Syntax -XNPV(Rate; Values; Dates) - -Rate is the internal rate of return for the payments. - -Values and Dates refer to a series of payments and the series of associated date values. The first pair of dates defines the start of the payment plan. All other date values must be later, but need not be in any order. The series of values must contain at least one negative and one positive value (receipts and deposits) -Example -Calculation of the net present value for the above-mentioned five payments for a notional internal rate of return of 6%. - -=XNPV(0.06;B1:B5;A1:A5) returns 323.02. + +XNPV +Calculates the capital value (net present value)for a list of payments which take place on different dates. The calculation is based on a 365 days per year basis, ignoring leap years. +If the payments take place at regular intervals, use the NPV function. + +Syntax +XNPV(Rate; Values; Dates) +Rate is the internal rate of return for the payments. +Values and Dates refer to a series of payments and the series of associated date values. The first pair of dates defines the start of the payment plan. All other date values must be later, but need not be in any order. The series of values must contain at least one negative and one positive value (receipts and deposits) + +Example +Calculation of the net present value for the above-mentioned five payments for a notional internal rate of return of 6%. +=XNPV(0.06;B1:B5;A1:A5) returns 323.02.
+
-calculating;rates of return -RRI function + + calculating;rates of return + RRI function + -RRI -Calculates the interest rate resulting from the profit (return) of an investment. -Syntax -RRI(P; PV; FV) - -P is the number of periods needed for calculating the interest rate. - -PV is the present (current) value. The cash value is the deposit of cash or the current cash value of an allowance in kind. As a deposit value a positive value must be entered; the deposit must not be 0 or <0. - -FV determines what is desired as the cash value of the deposit. -Example -For four periods (years) and a cash value of 7,500 currency units, the interest rate of the return is to be calculated if the future value is 10,000 currency units. - -=RRI(4;7500;10000) = 7.46 % -The interest rate must be 7.46 % so that 7,500 currency units will become 10,000 currency units. + +RRI +Calculates the interest rate resulting from the profit (return) of an investment. + +Syntax +RRI(P; PV; FV) +P is the number of periods needed for calculating the interest rate. +PV is the present (current) value. The cash value is the deposit of cash or the current cash value of an allowance in kind. As a deposit value a positive value must be entered; the deposit must not be 0 or <0. +FV determines what is desired as the cash value of the deposit. + +Example +For four periods (years) and a cash value of 7,500 currency units, the interest rate of the return is to be calculated if the future value is 10,000 currency units. +=RRI(4;7500;10000) = 7.46 % +The interest rate must be 7.46 % so that 7,500 currency units will become 10,000 currency units.
+
-calculating;constant interest rates -constant interest rates -RATE function + + calculating;constant interest rates + constant interest rates + RATE function + -RATE -Returns the constant interest rate per period of an annuity. -Syntax -RATE(NPer; Pmt; PV; FV; Type; Guess) - -NPer is the total number of periods, during which payments are made (payment period). - -Pmt is the constant payment (annuity) paid during each period. - -PV is the cash value in the sequence of payments. - -FV (optional) is the future value, which is reached at the end of the periodic payments. - -Type (optional) is the due date of the periodic payment, either at the beginning or at the end of a period. - -Guess (optional) determines the estimated value of the interest with iterative calculation. - - - -Example -What is the constant interest rate for a payment period of 3 periods if 10 currency units are paid regularly and the present cash value is 900 currency units. - -=RATE(3;10;900) = -121% The interest rate is therefore 121%. + +RATE +Returns the constant interest rate per period of an annuity. + +Syntax +RATE(NPer; Pmt; PV; FV; Type; Guess) +NPer is the total number of periods, during which payments are made (payment period). +Pmt is the constant payment (annuity) paid during each period. +PV is the cash value in the sequence of payments. +FV (optional) is the future value, which is reached at the end of the periodic payments. +Type (optional) is the due date of the periodic payment, either at the beginning or at the end of a period. +Guess (optional) determines the estimated value of the interest with iterative calculation. + + +Example +What is the constant interest rate for a payment period of 3 periods if 10 currency units are paid regularly and the present cash value is 900 currency units. +=RATE(3;10;900) = -121% The interest rate is therefore 121%.
+
-INTRATE function + + INTRATE function + -INTRATE -Calculates the annual interest rate that results when a security (or other item) is purchased at an investment value and sold at a redemption value. No interest is paid. -Syntax -INTRATE(Settlement; Maturity; Investment; Redemption; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security is sold. - -Investment is the purchase price. - -Redemption is the selling price. + +INTRATE +Calculates the annual interest rate that results when a security (or other item) is purchased at an investment value and sold at a redemption value. No interest is paid. + +Syntax +INTRATE(Settlement; Maturity; Investment; Redemption; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security is sold. +Investment is the purchase price. +Redemption is the selling price. -Example -A painting is bought on 1990-01-15 for 1 million and sold on 2002-05-05 for 2 million. The basis is daily balance calculation (basis = 3). What is the average annual level of interest? -=INTRATE("1990-01-15"; "2002-05-05"; 1000000; 2000000; 3) returns 8.12%. + +Example +A painting is bought on 1990-01-15 for 1 million and sold on 2002-05-05 for 2 million. The basis is daily balance calculation (basis = 3). What is the average annual level of interest? +=INTRATE("1990-01-15"; "2002-05-05"; 1000000; 2000000; 3) returns 8.12%.
+
-COUPNCD function + + COUPNCD function + -COUPNCD -Returns the date of the first interest date after the settlement date. Format the result as a date. -Syntax -COUPNCD(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +COUPNCD +Returns the date of the first interest date after the settlement date. Format the result as a date. + +Syntax +COUPNCD(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) when is the next interest date? -=COUPNCD("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 2001-05-15. + +Example +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) when is the next interest date? +=COUPNCD("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 2001-05-15.
+
-COUPDAYS function + + COUPDAYS function + -COUPDAYS -Returns the number of days in the current interest period in which the settlement date falls. -Syntax -COUPDAYS(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +COUPDAYS +Returns the number of days in the current interest period in which the settlement date falls. + +Syntax +COUPDAYS(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many days are there in the interest period in which the settlement date falls? -=COUPDAYS("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 181. + +Example +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many days are there in the interest period in which the settlement date falls? +=COUPDAYS("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 181.
+
-COUPDAYSNC function + + COUPDAYSNC function + -COUPDAYSNC -Returns the number of days from the settlement date until the next interest date. -Syntax -COUPDAYSNC(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +COUPDAYSNC +Returns the number of days from the settlement date until the next interest date. + +Syntax +COUPDAYSNC(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many days are there until the next interest payment? -=COUPDAYSNC("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 110. + +Example +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many days are there until the next interest payment? +=COUPDAYSNC("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 110.
+
-COUPDAYBS function -durations;first interest payment until settlement date -securities;first interest payment until settlement date -mw added "durations;" and "securities;" + + COUPDAYBS function + durations;first interest payment until settlement date + securities;first interest payment until settlement date + +mw added "durations;" and "securities;" -COUPDAYBS -Returns the number of days from the first day of interest payment on a security until the settlement date. -Syntax -COUPDAYBS(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +COUPDAYBS +Returns the number of days from the first day of interest payment on a security until the settlement date. + +Syntax +COUPDAYBS(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many days is this? -=COUPDAYBS("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 71. + +Example +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many days is this? +=COUPDAYBS("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 71.
+
-COUPPCD function -dates;interest date prior to settlement date -mw added "dates;" + + COUPPCD function + dates;interest date prior to settlement date + +mw added "dates;" -COUPPCD -Returns the date of the interest date prior to the settlement date. Format the result as a date. -Syntax -COUPPCD(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +COUPPCD +Returns the date of the interest date prior to the settlement date. Format the result as a date. + +Syntax +COUPPCD(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) what was the interest date prior to purchase? -=COUPPCD("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 2000-15-11. + +Example +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) what was the interest date prior to purchase? +=COUPPCD("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 2000-15-11.
+
-COUPNUM function -number of coupons -mw added "number..." + + COUPNUM function + number of coupons + +mw added "number..." -COUPNUM -Returns the number of coupons (interest payments) between the settlement date and the maturity date. -Syntax -COUPNUM(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) - -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +COUPNUM +Returns the number of coupons (interest payments) between the settlement date and the maturity date. + +Syntax +COUPNUM(Settlement; Maturity; Frequency; Basis) +Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. +Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). +Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). -Example -A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many interest dates are there? -=COUPNUM("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 2. + +Example +A security is purchased on 2001-01-25; the date of maturity is 2001-11-15. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how many interest dates are there? +=COUPNUM("2001-01-25"; "2001-11-15"; 2; 3) returns 2.
+
-IPMT function -periodic amortizement rates -mw added "periodic..." + + IPMT function + periodic amortizement rates + +mw added "periodic..." -IPMT -Calculates the periodic amortizement for an investment with regular payments and a constant interest rate. -Syntax -IPMT(Rate; Period; NPer; PV; FV; Type) - -Rate is the periodic interest rate. - -Period is the period, for which the compound interest is calculated. Period=NPER if compound interest for the last period is calculated. - -NPer is the total number of periods, during which annuity is paid. - -PV is the present cash value in sequence of payments. - -FV (optional) is the desired value (future value) at the end of the periods. - -Type is the due date for the periodic payments. -Example -What is the interest rate during the fifth period (year) if the constant interest rate is 5% and the cash value is 15,000 currency units? The periodic payment is seven years. - -=IPMT(5%;5;7;15000) = -352.97 currency units. The compound interest during the fifth period (year) is 352.97 currency units. + +IPMT +Calculates the periodic amortizement for an investment with regular payments and a constant interest rate. + +Syntax +IPMT(Rate; Period; NPer; PV; FV; Type) +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +Period is the period, for which the compound interest is calculated. Period=NPER if compound interest for the last period is calculated. +NPer is the total number of periods, during which annuity is paid. +PV is the present cash value in sequence of payments. +FV (optional) is the desired value (future value) at the end of the periods. +Type is the due date for the periodic payments. + +Example +What is the interest rate during the fifth period (year) if the constant interest rate is 5% and the cash value is 15,000 currency units? The periodic payment is seven years. +=IPMT(5%;5;7;15000) = -352.97 currency units. The compound interest during the fifth period (year) is 352.97 currency units.
+
-calculating;future values -future values;constant interest rates -FV function -mw made "future values..." a two level entry + + calculating;future values + future values;constant interest rates + FV function + +mw made "future values..." a two level entry -FV -Returns the future value of an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate (Future Value). -Syntax -FV(Rate; NPer; Pmt; PV; Type) - -Rate is the periodic interest rate. - -NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). - -Pmt is the annuity paid regularly per period. - -PV (optional) is the (present) cash value of an investment. - -Type (optional) defines whether the payment is due at the beginning or the end of a period. - - - -Example -What is the value at the end of an investment if the interest rate is 4% and the payment period is two years, with a periodic payment of 750 currency units. The investment has a present value of 2,500 currency units. - -=FV(4%;2;750;2500) = -4234.00 currency units. The value at the end of the investment is 4234.00 currency units. + +FV +Returns the future value of an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate (Future Value). + +Syntax +FV(Rate; NPer; Pmt; PV; Type) +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). +Pmt is the annuity paid regularly per period. +PV (optional) is the (present) cash value of an investment. +Type (optional) defines whether the payment is due at the beginning or the end of a period. + + +Example +What is the value at the end of an investment if the interest rate is 4% and the payment period is two years, with a periodic payment of 750 currency units. The investment has a present value of 2,500 currency units. +=FV(4%;2;750;2500) = -4234.00 currency units. The value at the end of the investment is 4234.00 currency units.
+
-FVSCHEDULE function -future values;varying interest rates -mw added "future values" + + FVSCHEDULE function + future values;varying interest rates + +mw added "future values" -FVSCHEDULE -Calculates the accumulated value of the starting capital for a series of periodically varying interest rates. -Syntax -FVSCHEDULE(Principal; Schedule) - -Principal is the starting capital. - -Schedule is a series of interest rates, for example, as a range H3:H5 or as a (List) (see example). -Example -1000 currency units have been invested in for three years. The interest rates were 3%, 4% and 5% per annum. What is the value after three years? - -=FVSCHEDULE(1000;{0.03;0.04;0.05}) returns 1124.76. + +FVSCHEDULE +Calculates the accumulated value of the starting capital for a series of periodically varying interest rates. + +Syntax +FVSCHEDULE(Principal; Schedule) +Principal is the starting capital. +Schedule is a series of interest rates, for example, as a range H3:H5 or as a (List) (see example). + +Example +1000 currency units have been invested in for three years. The interest rates were 3%, 4% and 5% per annum. What is the value after three years? +=FVSCHEDULE(1000;{0.03;0.04;0.05}) returns 1124.76.
+
-calculating;number of payment periods -payment periods;number of -number of payment periods -NPER function + + calculating;number of payment periods + payment periods;number of + number of payment periods + NPER function + -NPER -Returns the number of periods for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate. -Syntax -NPER(Rate; Pmt; PV; FV; Type) - -Rate is the periodic interest rate. - -Pmt is the constant annuity paid in each period. - -PV is the present value (cash value) in a sequence of payments. - -FV (optional) is the future value, which is reached at the end of the last period. - -Type (optional) is the due date of the payment at the beginning or at the end of the period. - - - -Example -How many payment periods does a payment period cover with a periodic interest rate of 6%, a periodic payment of 153.75 currency units and a present cash value of 2.600 currency units. - -=NPER(6%;153.75;2600) = -12,02. The payment period covers 12.02 periods. + +NPER +Returns the number of periods for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate. + +Syntax +NPER(Rate; Pmt; PV; FV; Type) +Rate is the periodic interest rate. +Pmt is the constant annuity paid in each period. +PV is the present value (cash value) in a sequence of payments. +FV (optional) is the future value, which is reached at the end of the last period. +Type (optional) is the due date of the payment at the beginning or at the end of the period. + + +Example +How many payment periods does a payment period cover with a periodic interest rate of 6%, a periodic payment of 153.75 currency units and a present cash value of 2.600 currency units. +=NPER(6%;153.75;2600) = -12,02. The payment period covers 12.02 periods.
-Back to Financial Functions Part One -Back to Financial Functions Part Two +Back to Financial Functions Part One +Back to Financial Functions Part Two - + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp b/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp index 8ea42e9d79..b21faee62f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> - - Statistical Functions Part One - /text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp - - - - Statistical Functions Part One - + + Statistical Functions Part One + /text/scalc/01/04060181.xhp + + + + + + +Statistical Functions Part One +
-INTERCEPT function - points of intersection - intersections -mw added two entries + + INTERCEPT function + points of intersection + intersections + +mw added two entries -INTERCEPT - Calculates the point at which a line will intersect the y-values by using known x-values and y-values. - Syntax - INTERCEPT(DataY; DataX) - - DataY is the dependent set of observations or data. - - DataX is the independent set of observations or data. - Names, arrays or references containing numbers must be used here. Numbers can also be entered directly. - Example - To calculate the intercept, use cells D3:D9 as the y value and C3:C9 as the x value from the example spreadsheet. Input will be as follows: - - =INTERCEPT(D3:D9;C3:C9) = 2.15. -
-
-COUNT function - numbers;counting -mw added one entry + +INTERCEPT +Calculates the point at which a line will intersect the y-values by using known x-values and y-values. + +Syntax +INTERCEPT(DataY; DataX) +DataY is the dependent set of observations or data. +DataX is the independent set of observations or data. +Names, arrays or references containing numbers must be used here. Numbers can also be entered directly. + +Example +To calculate the intercept, use cells D3:D9 as the y value and C3:C9 as the x value from the example spreadsheet. Input will be as follows: +=INTERCEPT(D3:D9;C3:C9) = 2.15. +
+ +
+ + COUNT function + numbers;counting + +mw added one entry -COUNT - Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments. Text entries are ignored. - Syntax - COUNT(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) - - Value1; Value2, ... are 1 to 30 values or ranges representing the values to be counted. - Example - The entries 2, 4, 6 and eight in the Value 1-4 fields are to be counted. - - =COUNT(2;4;6;"eight") = 3. The count of numbers is therefore 3. -
-
-COUNTA function - number of entries -mw added one entry + +COUNT +Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments. Text entries are ignored. + +Syntax +COUNT(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) +Value1; Value2, ... are 1 to 30 values or ranges representing the values to be counted. + +Example +The entries 2, 4, 6 and eight in the Value 1-4 fields are to be counted. +=COUNT(2;4;6;"eight") = 3. The count of numbers is therefore 3. +
+ +
+ + COUNTA function + number of entries + +mw added one entry -COUNTA - Counts how many values are in the list of arguments. Text entries are also counted, even when they contain an empty string of length 0. If an argument is an array or reference, empty cells within the array or reference are ignored.UFI: fix to #i35888# - Syntax - COUNTA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) - - Value1; Value2, ... are 1 to 30 arguments representing the values to be counted. - Example - The entries 2, 4, 6 and eight in the Value 1-4 fields are to be counted. - - =COUNTA(2;4;6;"eight") = 4. The count of values is therefore 4. -
+ +COUNTA +Counts how many values are in the list of arguments. Text entries are also counted, even when they contain an empty string of length 0. If an argument is an array or reference, empty cells within the array or reference are ignored.UFI: fix to #i35888# + +Syntax +COUNTA(Value1; Value2; ... Value30) +Value1; Value2, ... are 1 to 30 arguments representing the values to be counted. + +Example +The entries 2, 4, 6 and eight in the Value 1-4 fields are to be counted. +=COUNTA(2;4;6;"eight") = 4. The count of values is therefore 4. + +
-COUNTBLANK function -counting;empty cells -empty cells;counting + + COUNTBLANK function + counting;empty cells + empty cells;counting + -COUNTBLANK -Returns the number of empty cells. -Syntax -COUNTBLANK(Range) -Returns the number of empty cells in the cell range Range. -Example - -=COUNTBLANK(A1:B2) returns 4 if cells A1, A2, B1, and B2 are all empty.see also COUNTIF + +COUNTBLANK +Returns the number of empty cells. + +Syntax +COUNTBLANK(Range) +Returns the number of empty cells in the cell range Range. + +Example +=COUNTBLANK(A1:B2) returns 4 if cells A1, A2, B1, and B2 are all empty.see also COUNTIF
+
-COUNTIF function -counting;specified cells -mw added one entry + + COUNTIF function + counting;specified cells + +mw added one entry -COUNTIF -Returns the number of cells that meet with certain criteria within a cell range. + +COUNTIF +Returns the number of cells that meet with certain criteria within a cell range. -Syntax -COUNTIF(Range; Criteria) -Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. -Criteria indicates the criteria in the form of a number, an expression or a character string. These criteria determine which cells are counted. You may also enter a search text in the form of a regular expression, e.g. b.* for all words that begin with b. You may also indicate a cell range that contains the search criterion. If you search for literal text, enclose the text in double quotes. -Example -A1:A10 is a cell range containing the numbers 2000 to 2009. Cell B1 contains the number 2006. In cell B2, you enter a formula: - -=COUNTIF(A1:A10;2006) - this returns 1 - -=COUNTIF(A1:A10;B1) - this returns 1 - -=COUNTIF(A1:A10;">=2006") - this returns 4 - -=COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<"&B1) - when B1 contains 2006, this returns 6 - -=COUNTIF(A1:A10;C2) where cell C2 contains the text >2006 counts the number of cells in the range A1:A10 which are >2006 -To count only negative numbers: =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<0") - + +Syntax +COUNTIF(Range; Criteria) +Range is the range to which the criteria are to be applied. +Criteria indicates the criteria in the form of a number, an expression or a character string. These criteria determine which cells are counted. You may also enter a search text in the form of a regular expression, e.g. b.* for all words that begin with b. You may also indicate a cell range that contains the search criterion. If you search for literal text, enclose the text in double quotes. + +Example +A1:A10 is a cell range containing the numbers 2000 to 2009. Cell B1 contains the number 2006. In cell B2, you enter a formula: +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;2006) - this returns 1 +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;B1) - this returns 1 +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;">=2006") - this returns 4 +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<"&B1) - when B1 contains 2006, this returns 6 +=COUNTIF(A1:A10;C2) where cell C2 contains the text >2006 counts the number of cells in the range A1:A10 which are >2006 +To count only negative numbers: =COUNTIF(A1:A10;"<0")
+
+
-
-B function - probabilities of samples with binomial distribution -mw added one entry + +
+ + B function + probabilities of samples with binomial distribution + +mw added one entry -B - Returns the probability of a sample with binomial distribution. - Syntax - B(Trials; SP; T1; T2) - - Trials is the number of independent trials. - - SP is the probability of success on each trial. - - T1 defines the lower limit for the number of trials. - - T2 (optional) defines the upper limit for the number of trials. - Example - What is the probability with ten throws of the dice, that a six will come up exactly twice? The probability of a six (or any other number) is 1/6. The following formula combines these factors: - - =B(10;1/6;2) returns a probability of 29%. -
-
-RSQ function - determination coefficients - regression analysis -mw added regression analysis + +B +Returns the probability of a sample with binomial distribution. + +Syntax +B(Trials; SP; T1; T2) +Trials is the number of independent trials. +SP is the probability of success on each trial. +T1 defines the lower limit for the number of trials. +T2 (optional) defines the upper limit for the number of trials. + +Example +What is the probability with ten throws of the dice, that a six will come up exactly twice? The probability of a six (or any other number) is 1/6. The following formula combines these factors: +=B(10;1/6;2) returns a probability of 29%. +
+ +
+ + RSQ function + determination coefficients + regression analysis + +mw added regression analysis -RSQ - Returns the square of the Pearson correlation coefficient based on the given values. RSQ (also called determination coefficient) is a measure for the accuracy of an adjustment and can be used to produce a regression analysis. - Syntax - RSQ(DataY; DataX) - - DataY is an array or range of data points. - - DataX is an array or range of data points. - Example - - =RSQ(A1:A20;B1:B20) calculates the determination coefficient for both data sets in columns A and B. -
-
-BETAINV function - cumulative probability density function;inverse of -mw added one entry + +RSQ +Returns the square of the Pearson correlation coefficient based on the given values. RSQ (also called determination coefficient) is a measure for the accuracy of an adjustment and can be used to produce a regression analysis. + +Syntax +RSQ(DataY; DataX) +DataY is an array or range of data points. +DataX is an array or range of data points. + +Example +=RSQ(A1:A20;B1:B20) calculates the determination coefficient for both data sets in columns A and B. +
+ +
+ + BETAINV function + cumulative probability density function;inverse of + +mw added one entry -BETAINV - Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function. - Syntax - BETAINV(Number; Alpha; Beta; Start; End) - - Number is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. - - Alpha is a parameter to the distribution. - - Beta is a parameter to the distribution. - - Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. - - End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. - - - - Example - - =BETAINV(0.5;5;10) returns the value 0.33. -
-
-BETA.INV function - cumulative probability density function;inverse of -mw added one entry + +BETAINV +Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function. + +Syntax +BETAINV(Number; Alpha; Beta; Start; End) +Number is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. +Alpha is a parameter to the distribution. +Beta is a parameter to the distribution. +Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. +End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. + + +Example +=BETAINV(0.5;5;10) returns the value 0.33. +
+ +
+ + BETA.INV function + cumulative probability density function;inverse of + +mw added one entry -BETA.INV - Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function. - Syntax - BETA.INV(Number; Alpha; Beta; Start; End) - Number is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. - Alpha is a parameter to the distribution. - Beta is a parameter to the distribution. - Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. - End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. - - Example - - =BETA.INV(0.5;5;10) returns the value 0.3257511553. -
-
-BETADIST function - cumulative probability density function;calculating -mw added one entry + +BETA.INV +Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function. + +Syntax +BETA.INV(Number; Alpha; Beta; Start; End) +Number is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. +Alpha is a parameter to the distribution. +Beta is a parameter to the distribution. +Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. +End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. + + +Example +=BETA.INV(0.5;5;10) returns the value 0.3257511553. +
+ +
+ + BETADIST function + cumulative probability density function;calculating + +mw added one entry -BETADIST - Returns the beta function. - Syntax - BETADIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; Start; End; Cumulative) - - Number is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. - - Alpha is a parameter to the distribution. - - Beta is a parameter to the distribution. - - Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. - - End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. - - Cumulative (optional) can be 0 or False to calculate the probability density function. It can be any other value or True or omitted to calculate the cumulative distribution function. - - - - Example - - =BETADIST(0.75;3;4) returns the value 0.96 -
-
-BETA.DIST function - cumulative probability density function;calculating -mw added one entry + +BETADIST +Returns the beta function. + +Syntax +BETADIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; Start; End; Cumulative) +Number is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. +Alpha is a parameter to the distribution. +Beta is a parameter to the distribution. +Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. +End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. +Cumulative (optional) can be 0 or False to calculate the probability density function. It can be any other value or True or omitted to calculate the cumulative distribution function. + + +Example +=BETADIST(0.75;3;4) returns the value 0.96 +
+ +
+ + BETA.DIST function + cumulative probability density function;calculating + +mw added one entry -BETA.DIST - Returns the beta function. - Syntax - BETA.DIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; Cumulative; Start; End) - Number (required) is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. - Alpha (required) is a parameter to the distribution. - Beta (required) is a parameter to the distribution. - Cumulative (required) can be 0 or False to calculate the probability density function. It can be any other value or True to calculate the cumulative distribution function. - Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. - End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. - - Examples - =BETA.DIST(2;8;10;1;1;3) returns the value 0.6854706 - =BETA.DIST(2;8;10;0;1;3) returns the value 1.4837646 -
-
-BINOMDIST function + +BETA.DIST +Returns the beta function. + +Syntax +BETA.DIST(Number; Alpha; Beta; Cumulative; Start; End) +Number (required) is the value between Start and End at which to evaluate the function. +Alpha (required) is a parameter to the distribution. +Beta (required) is a parameter to the distribution. +Cumulative (required) can be 0 or False to calculate the probability density function. It can be any other value or True to calculate the cumulative distribution function. +Start (optional) is the lower bound for Number. +End (optional) is the upper bound for Number. + + +Examples +=BETA.DIST(2;8;10;1;1;3) returns the value 0.6854706 +=BETA.DIST(2;8;10;0;1;3) returns the value 1.4837646 +
+ +
+ + BINOMDIST function + -BINOMDIST - Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability. - Syntax - BINOMDIST(X; Trials; SP; C) - - X is the number of successes in a set of trials. - - Trials is the number of independent trials. - - SP is the probability of success on each trial. - - C = 0 calculates the probability of a single event and C = 1 calculates the cumulative probability. - Example - - =BINOMDIST(A1;12;0.5;0) shows (if the values 0 to 12 are entered in A1) the probabilities for 12 flips of a coin that Heads will come up exactly the number of times entered in A1. - - =BINOMDIST(A1;12;0.5;1) shows the cumulative probabilities for the same series. For example, if A1 = 4, the cumulative probability of the series is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 times Heads (non-exclusive OR). -
+ +BINOMDIST +Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability. + +Syntax +BINOMDIST(X; Trials; SP; C) +X is the number of successes in a set of trials. +Trials is the number of independent trials. +SP is the probability of success on each trial. +C = 0 calculates the probability of a single event and C = 1 calculates the cumulative probability. + +Example +=BINOMDIST(A1;12;0.5;0) shows (if the values 0 to 12 are entered in A1) the probabilities for 12 flips of a coin that Heads will come up exactly the number of times entered in A1. +=BINOMDIST(A1;12;0.5;1) shows the cumulative probabilities for the same series. For example, if A1 = 4, the cumulative probability of the series is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 times Heads (non-exclusive OR). +
+
-BINOM.DIST function + + BINOM.DIST function + + -BINOM.DIST -Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability. -Syntax -BINOM.DIST(X; Trials; SP; C) -X is the number of successes in a set of trials. -Trials is the number of independent trials. -SP is the probability of success on each trial. -C = 0 calculates the probability of a single event and C = 1 calculates the cumulative probability. -Example - - =BINOM.DIST(A1;12;0.5;0) shows (if the values 0 to 12 are entered in A1) the probabilities for 12 flips of a coin that Heads will come up exactly the number of times entered in A1. - - =BINOM.DIST(A1;12;0.5;1) shows the cumulative probabilities for the same series. For example, if A1 = 4, the cumulative probability of the series is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 times Heads (non-exclusive OR). + +BINOM.DIST +Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability. + +Syntax +BINOM.DIST(X; Trials; SP; C) +X is the number of successes in a set of trials. +Trials is the number of independent trials. +SP is the probability of success on each trial. +C = 0 calculates the probability of a single event and C = 1 calculates the cumulative probability. + +Example +=BINOM.DIST(A1;12;0.5;0) shows (if the values 0 to 12 are entered in A1) the probabilities for 12 flips of a coin that Heads will come up exactly the number of times entered in A1. +=BINOM.DIST(A1;12;0.5;1) shows the cumulative probabilities for the same series. For example, if A1 = 4, the cumulative probability of the series is 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 times Heads (non-exclusive OR).
+
-BINOM.INV function + + BINOM.INV function + + -BINOM.INV -Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. -Syntax -BINOM.INV(Trials; SP; Alpha) -Trials The total number of trials. -SP is the probability of success on each trial. -AlphaThe border probability that is attained or exceeded. -Example -=BINOM.INV(8;0.6;0.9) returns 7, the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. + +BINOM.INV +Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. + +Syntax +BINOM.INV(Trials; SP; Alpha) +Trials The total number of trials. +SP is the probability of success on each trial. +AlphaThe border probability that is attained or exceeded. + +Example +=BINOM.INV(8;0.6;0.9) returns 7, the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value.
-
+ +
-CHISQINV function + + CHISQINV function -CHISQINV - Returns the inverse of CHISQDIST. - Syntax - - Probability is the probability value for which the inverse of the chi-square distribution is to be calculated. - - Degrees Of Freedom is the degrees of freedom for the chi-square function. -
+ + +CHISQINV +Returns the inverse of CHISQDIST. + +Syntax +Probability is the probability value for which the inverse of the chi-square distribution is to be calculated. +Degrees Of Freedom is the degrees of freedom for the chi-square function. +
+
- - - CHISQ.INV function - - CHISQ.INV - Returns the inverse of the left-tailed probability of the chi-square distribution. - Syntax - CHISQ.INV(Probability; DegreesFreedom) - Probability is the probability value for which the inverse of the chi-square distribution is to be calculated. - Degrees Of Freedom is the degrees of freedom for the chi-square function. - Example - =CHISQ.INV(0,5;1) returns 0.4549364231. -
-
-CHIINV function + + + CHISQ.INV function + + + +CHISQ.INV +Returns the inverse of the left-tailed probability of the chi-square distribution. + +Syntax +CHISQ.INV(Probability; DegreesFreedom) +Probability is the probability value for which the inverse of the chi-square distribution is to be calculated. +Degrees Of Freedom is the degrees of freedom for the chi-square function. + +Example +=CHISQ.INV(0,5;1) returns 0.4549364231. +
+ +
+ + CHIINV function + -CHIINV - Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. - Syntax - CHIINV(Number; DegreesFreedom) - - Number is the value of the error probability. - - DegreesFreedom is the degrees of freedom of the experiment. - Example - A die is thrown 1020 times. The numbers on the die 1 through 6 come up 195, 151, 148, 189, 183 and 154 times (observation values). The hypothesis that the die is not fixed is to be tested. - The Chi square distribution of the random sample is determined by the formula given above. Since the expected value for a given number on the die for n throws is n times 1/6, thus 1020/6 = 170, the formula returns a Chi square value of 13.27. - If the (observed) Chi square is greater than or equal to the (theoretical) Chi square CHIINV, the hypothesis will be discarded, since the deviation between theory and experiment is too great. If the observed Chi square is less that CHIINV, the hypothesis is confirmed with the indicated probability of error. - - =CHIINV(0.05;5) returns 11.07. - - =CHIINV(0.02;5) returns 13.39. - If the probability of error is 5%, the die is not true. If the probability of error is 2%, there is no reason to believe it is fixed. -
+ +CHIINV +Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. + +Syntax +CHIINV(Number; DegreesFreedom) +Number is the value of the error probability. +DegreesFreedom is the degrees of freedom of the experiment. + +Example +A die is thrown 1020 times. The numbers on the die 1 through 6 come up 195, 151, 148, 189, 183 and 154 times (observation values). The hypothesis that the die is not fixed is to be tested. +The Chi square distribution of the random sample is determined by the formula given above. Since the expected value for a given number on the die for n throws is n times 1/6, thus 1020/6 = 170, the formula returns a Chi square value of 13.27. +If the (observed) Chi square is greater than or equal to the (theoretical) Chi square CHIINV, the hypothesis will be discarded, since the deviation between theory and experiment is too great. If the observed Chi square is less that CHIINV, the hypothesis is confirmed with the indicated probability of error. +=CHIINV(0.05;5) returns 11.07. +=CHIINV(0.02;5) returns 13.39. +If the probability of error is 5%, the die is not true. If the probability of error is 2%, there is no reason to believe it is fixed. + +
- - CHISQ.INV.RT function - - - CHISQ.INV.RT - Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. - Syntax - CHISQ.INV.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom) - Number is the value of the error probability. - DegreesFreedom is the degrees of freedom of the experiment. - Example - A die is thrown 1020 times. The numbers on the die 1 through 6 come up 195, 151, 148, 189, 183 and 154 times (observation values). The hypothesis that the die is not fixed is to be tested. - The Chi square distribution of the random sample is determined by the formula given above. Since the expected value for a given number on the die for n throws is n times 1/6, thus 1020/6 = 170, the formula returns a Chi square value of 13.27. - If the (observed) Chi square is greater than or equal to the (theoretical) Chi square CHIINV, the hypothesis will be discarded, since the deviation between theory and experiment is too great. If the observed Chi square is less that CHIINV, the hypothesis is confirmed with the indicated probability of error. - =CHISQ.INV.RT(0.05;5) returns 11.0704976935. - =CHISQ.INV.RT(0.02;5) returns 13.388222599. - If the probability of error is 5%, the die is not true. If the probability of error is 2%, there is no reason to believe it is fixed. + + CHISQ.INV.RT function + + + + +CHISQ.INV.RT +Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. + +Syntax +CHISQ.INV.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom) +Number is the value of the error probability. +DegreesFreedom is the degrees of freedom of the experiment. + +Example +A die is thrown 1020 times. The numbers on the die 1 through 6 come up 195, 151, 148, 189, 183 and 154 times (observation values). The hypothesis that the die is not fixed is to be tested. +The Chi square distribution of the random sample is determined by the formula given above. Since the expected value for a given number on the die for n throws is n times 1/6, thus 1020/6 = 170, the formula returns a Chi square value of 13.27. +If the (observed) Chi square is greater than or equal to the (theoretical) Chi square CHIINV, the hypothesis will be discarded, since the deviation between theory and experiment is too great. If the observed Chi square is less that CHIINV, the hypothesis is confirmed with the indicated probability of error. +=CHISQ.INV.RT(0.05;5) returns 11.0704976935. +=CHISQ.INV.RT(0.02;5) returns 13.388222599. +If the probability of error is 5%, the die is not true. If the probability of error is 2%, there is no reason to believe it is fixed.
-
-CHITEST function + +
+ + CHITEST function + -CHITEST - Returns the probability of a deviance from a random distribution of two test series based on the chi-squared test for independence. CHITEST returns the chi-squared distribution of the data. - The probability determined by CHITEST can also be determined with CHIDIST, in which case the Chi square of the random sample must then be passed as a parameter instead of the data row. - Syntax - CHITEST(DataB; DataE) - - DataB is the array of the observations. - - DataE is the range of the expected values. - Example - - - - - - Data_B (observed) - - - Data_E (expected) - - - - - 1 - - - - 195 - - - - - 170 - - - - - - 2 - - - - 151 - - - - - 170 - - - - - - 3 - - - - 148 - - - - - 170 - - - - - - 4 - - - - 189 - - - - - 170 - - - - - - 5 - - - - 183 - - - - - 170 - - - - - - 6 - - - - 154 - - - - - 170 - - - -
- - - =CHITEST(A1:A6;B1:B6) equals 0.02. This is the probability which suffices the observed data of the theoretical Chi-square distribution. -
+ +CHITEST +Returns the probability of a deviance from a random distribution of two test series based on the chi-squared test for independence. CHITEST returns the chi-squared distribution of the data. +The probability determined by CHITEST can also be determined with CHIDIST, in which case the Chi square of the random sample must then be passed as a parameter instead of the data row. + +Syntax +CHITEST(DataB; DataE) +DataB is the array of the observations. +DataE is the range of the expected values. + +Example + + + + + + + Data_B (observed) + + + Data_E (expected) + + + + + 1 + + + 195 + + + 170 + + + + + 2 + + + 151 + + + 170 + + + + + 3 + + + 148 + + + 170 + + + + + 4 + + + 189 + + + 170 + + + + + 5 + + + 183 + + + 170 + + + + + 6 + + + 154 + + + 170 + + +
+ +=CHITEST(A1:A6;B1:B6) equals 0.02. This is the probability which suffices the observed data of the theoretical Chi-square distribution. +
+
- - CHISQ.TEST function - - - CHISQ.TEST - Returns the probability of a deviance from a random distribution of two test series based on the chi-squared test for independence. CHISQ.TEST returns the chi-squared distribution of the data. - The probability determined by CHISQ.TEST can also be determined with CHISQ.DIST, in which case the Chi square of the random sample must then be passed as a parameter instead of the data row. - Syntax - CHISQ.TEST(DataB; DataE) - DataB is the array of the observations. - DataE is the range of the expected values. - Example - - - - - - Data_B (observed) - - - Data_E (expected) - - - - - 1 - - - 195 - - - 170 - - - - - 2 - - - 151 - - - 170 - - - - - 3 - - - 148 - - - 170 - - - - - 4 - - - 189 - - - 170 - - - - - 5 - - - 183 - - - 170 - - - - - 6 - - - 154 - - - 170 - - -
- =CHISQ.TEST(A1:A6;B1:B6) equals 0.0209708029. This is the probability which suffices the observed data of the theoretical Chi-square distribution. + + CHISQ.TEST function + + + + +CHISQ.TEST +Returns the probability of a deviance from a random distribution of two test series based on the chi-squared test for independence. CHISQ.TEST returns the chi-squared distribution of the data. +The probability determined by CHISQ.TEST can also be determined with CHISQ.DIST, in which case the Chi square of the random sample must then be passed as a parameter instead of the data row. + +Syntax +CHISQ.TEST(DataB; DataE) +DataB is the array of the observations. +DataE is the range of the expected values. + +Example + + + + + + + Data_B (observed) + + + Data_E (expected) + + + + + 1 + + + 195 + + + 170 + + + + + 2 + + + 151 + + + 170 + + + + + 3 + + + 148 + + + 170 + + + + + 4 + + + 189 + + + 170 + + + + + 5 + + + 183 + + + 170 + + + + + 6 + + + 154 + + + 170 + + +
+ +=CHISQ.TEST(A1:A6;B1:B6) equals 0.0209708029. This is the probability which suffices the observed data of the theoretical Chi-square distribution.
-
-CHIDIST function + +
+ + CHIDIST function + -CHIDIST - Returns the probability value from the indicated Chi square that a hypothesis is confirmed. CHIDIST compares the Chi square value to be given for a random sample that is calculated from the sum of (observed value-expected value)^2/expected value for all values with the theoretical Chi square distribution and determines from this the probability of error for the hypothesis to be tested. - The probability determined by CHIDIST can also be determined by CHITEST. - Syntax - CHIDIST(Number; DegreesFreedom) - - Number is the chi-square value of the random sample used to determine the error probability. - - DegreesFreedom are the degrees of freedom of the experiment. - Example - - =CHIDIST(13.27; 5) equals 0.02. - If the Chi square value of the random sample is 13.27 and if the experiment has 5 degrees of freedom, then the hypothesis is assured with a probability of error of 2%. -
+ +CHIDIST +Returns the probability value from the indicated Chi square that a hypothesis is confirmed. CHIDIST compares the Chi square value to be given for a random sample that is calculated from the sum of (observed value-expected value)^2/expected value for all values with the theoretical Chi square distribution and determines from this the probability of error for the hypothesis to be tested. +The probability determined by CHIDIST can also be determined by CHITEST. + +Syntax +CHIDIST(Number; DegreesFreedom) +Number is the chi-square value of the random sample used to determine the error probability. +DegreesFreedom are the degrees of freedom of the experiment. + +Example +=CHIDIST(13.27; 5) equals 0.02. +If the Chi square value of the random sample is 13.27 and if the experiment has 5 degrees of freedom, then the hypothesis is assured with a probability of error of 2%. +
+
- - CHISQ.DIST function - - - CHISQ.DIST - Returns the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution. - Syntax - CHISQ.DIST(Number; DegreesFreedom; Cumulative) - Number is the chi-square value of the random sample used to determine the error probability. - DegreesFreedom are the degrees of freedom of the experiment. - Cumulative can be 0 or False to calculate the probability density function. It can be any other value or True to calculate the cumulative distribution function. - Example - =CHISQ.DIST(3; 2; 0) equals 0.1115650801, the probability density function with 2 degrees of freedom, at x = 3. - =CHISQ.DIST(3; 2; 1) equals 0.7768698399, the cumulative chi-square distribution with 2 degrees of freedom, at the value x = 3 + + CHISQ.DIST function + + + + +CHISQ.DIST +Returns the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution. + +Syntax +CHISQ.DIST(Number; DegreesFreedom; Cumulative) +Number is the chi-square value of the random sample used to determine the error probability. +DegreesFreedom are the degrees of freedom of the experiment. +Cumulative can be 0 or False to calculate the probability density function. It can be any other value or True to calculate the cumulative distribution function. + +Example +=CHISQ.DIST(3; 2; 0) equals 0.1115650801, the probability density function with 2 degrees of freedom, at x = 3. +=CHISQ.DIST(3; 2; 1) equals 0.7768698399, the cumulative chi-square distribution with 2 degrees of freedom, at the value x = 3
+
- - CHISQ.DIST.RT function - - - CHISQ.DIST.RT - Returns the probability value from the indicated Chi square that a hypothesis is confirmed. CHISQ.DIST.RT compares the Chi square value to be given for a random sample that is calculated from the sum of (observed value-expected value)^2/expected value for all values with the theoretical Chi square distribution and determines from this the probability of error for the hypothesis to be tested. - The probability determined by CHISQ.DIST.RT can also be determined by CHITEST. - Syntax - CHISQ.DIST.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom) - Number is the chi-square value of the random sample used to determine the error probability. - DegreesFreedom are the degrees of freedom of the experiment. - Example - =CHISQ.DIST.RT(13.27; 5) equals 0.0209757694. - If the Chi square value of the random sample is 13.27 and if the experiment has 5 degrees of freedom, then the hypothesis is assured with a probability of error of 2%. + + CHISQ.DIST.RT function + + + + +CHISQ.DIST.RT +Returns the probability value from the indicated Chi square that a hypothesis is confirmed. CHISQ.DIST.RT compares the Chi square value to be given for a random sample that is calculated from the sum of (observed value-expected value)^2/expected value for all values with the theoretical Chi square distribution and determines from this the probability of error for the hypothesis to be tested. +The probability determined by CHISQ.DIST.RT can also be determined by CHITEST. + +Syntax +CHISQ.DIST.RT(Number; DegreesFreedom) +Number is the chi-square value of the random sample used to determine the error probability. +DegreesFreedom are the degrees of freedom of the experiment. + +Example +=CHISQ.DIST.RT(13.27; 5) equals 0.0209757694. +If the Chi square value of the random sample is 13.27 and if the experiment has 5 degrees of freedom, then the hypothesis is assured with a probability of error of 2%.
-
+ +
-CHISQDIST function -chi-square distribution + + CHISQDIST function + chi-square distribution -CHISQDIST - Returns the value of the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution. - Syntax - CHISQDIST(Number; Degrees Of Freedom; Cumulative) - - Number is the number for which the function is to be calculated. - - Degrees Of Freedom is the degrees of freedom for the chi-square function. - - Cumulative (optional): 0 or False calculates the probability density function. Other values or True or omitted calculates the cumulative distribution function. -
-
-EXPONDIST function - exponential distributions + + +CHISQDIST +Returns the value of the probability density function or the cumulative distribution function for the chi-square distribution. + +Syntax +CHISQDIST(Number; Degrees Of Freedom; Cumulative) +Number is the number for which the function is to be calculated. +Degrees Of Freedom is the degrees of freedom for the chi-square function. +Cumulative (optional): 0 or False calculates the probability density function. Other values or True or omitted calculates the cumulative distribution function. +
+ +
+ + EXPONDIST function + exponential distributions + -EXPONDIST - Returns the exponential distribution. - Syntax - EXPONDIST(Number; Lambda; C) - - Number is the value of the function. - - Lambda is the parameter value.UFI removed a double bookmark - - C is a logical value that determines the form of the function. C = 0 calculates the density function, and C = 1 calculates the distribution. - Example - - =EXPONDIST(3;0.5;1) returns 0.78. -
+ +EXPONDIST +Returns the exponential distribution. + +Syntax +EXPONDIST(Number; Lambda; C) +Number is the value of the function. +Lambda is the parameter value.UFI removed a double bookmark +C is a logical value that determines the form of the function. C = 0 calculates the density function, and C = 1 calculates the distribution. + +Example +=EXPONDIST(3;0.5;1) returns 0.78. +
+
- EXPON.DIST function - exponential distributions + EXPON.DIST function + exponential distributions + -EXPON.DIST -Returns the exponential distribution. -Syntax -EXPON.DIST(Number; Lambda; C) -Number is the value of the function. -Lambda is the parameter value.UFI removed a double bookmark -C is a logical value that determines the form of the function. C = 0 calculates the density function, and C = 1 calculates the distribution. -Example -=EXPON.DIST(3;0.5;1) returns 0.7768698399. + +EXPON.DIST +Returns the exponential distribution. + +Syntax +EXPON.DIST(Number; Lambda; C) +Number is the value of the function. +Lambda is the parameter value.UFI removed a double bookmark +C is a logical value that determines the form of the function. C = 0 calculates the density function, and C = 1 calculates the distribution. + +Example +=EXPON.DIST(3;0.5;1) returns 0.7768698399.
+
- -
- - + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp index 2db0f737c9..96d5cb2620 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> - - Recognizing Names as Addressing - /text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp - - - -automatic addressing in tables - natural language addressing - formulas; using row/column labels - text in cells; as addressing - addressing; automatic - name recognition on/off - row headers;using in formulas - column headers;using in formulas - columns; finding labels automatically - rows; finding labels automatically - recognizing; column and row labels -mw changes "names;..." entry to "text in cells;..."mw inserted three index entries from text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp. Changed "finding;..." entry to "recognizing;..." entry. Adding (Calc) is no longer necessary in this file. -Recognizing Names as Addressing - - You can use cells with text to refer to the rows or to the columns that contain the cells. -removed table as a workaround for issue 108715 - -Example spreadsheet - + + Recognizing Names as Addressing + /text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp + + + + + + + automatic addressing in tables + natural language addressing + formulas; using row/column labels + text in cells; as addressing + addressing; automatic + name recognition on/off + row headers;using in formulas + column headers;using in formulas + columns; finding labels automatically + rows; finding labels automatically + recognizing; column and row labels + +mw changes "names;..." entry to "text in cells;..."mw inserted three index entries from text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp. Changed "finding;..." entry to "recognizing;..." entry. Adding (Calc) is no longer necessary in this file. + +Recognizing Names as Addressing +You can use cells with text to refer to the rows or to the columns that contain the cells.removed table as a workaround for issue 108715 +Example spreadsheet +In the example spreadsheet, you can use the string 'Column One' in a formula to refer to the cell range B3 to B5, or 'Column Two' for the cell range C2 to C5. You can also use 'Row One' for the cell range B3 to D3, or 'Row Two' for the cell range B4 to D4. The result of a formula that uses a cell name, for example, SUM('Column One'), is 600. +This function is active by default. To turn this function off, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box. +If you want a name to be automatically recognized by Calc, the name must start with a letter and be composed of alphanumeric characters. If you enter the name in the formula yourself, enclose the name in single quotation marks ('). If a single quotation mark appears in a name, you must enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark, for example, 'Harry\'s Bar'. + +
mw changed reference to deleted Calc guide address_byname.xhp to refer to Calc guide value_with_name.xhpUFI: changed embedvar links to embed links + + + +
+ - In the example spreadsheet, you can use the string 'Column One' in a formula to refer to the cell range B3 to B5, or 'Column Two' for the cell range C2 to C5. You can also use 'Row One' for the cell range B3 to D3, or 'Row Two' for the cell range B4 to D4. The result of a formula that uses a cell name, for example, SUM('Column One'), is 600. - This function is active by default. To turn this function off, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box. - If you want a name to be automatically recognized by Calc, the name must start with a letter and be composed of alphanumeric characters. If you enter the name in the formula yourself, enclose the name in single quotation marks ('). If a single quotation mark appears in a name, you must enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark, for example, 'Harry\'s Bar'. - -
mw changed reference to deleted Calc guide address_byname.xhp to refer to Calc guide value_with_name.xhpUFI: changed embedvar links to embed links - - -
- \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp index 69605a6620..acafba6991 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Calculating With Dates and Times - /text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp - - - -dates; in cells - times; in cells - cells;date and time formats - current date and time values + + Calculating With Dates and Times + /text/scalc/guide/calc_date.xhp + + + + + + + dates; in cells + times; in cells + cells;date and time formats + current date and time values -Calculating With Dates and Times - - In $[officename] Calc, you can perform calculations with current date and time values. As an example, to find out exactly how old you are in seconds or hours, follow the following steps: - - - In a spreadsheet, enter your birthday in cell A1. - - - Enter the following formula in cell A3: =NOW()-A1 - - - - After pressing the Enter key you will see the result in date format. Since the result should show the difference between two dates as a number of days, you must format cell A3 as a number. - - - Place the cursor in cell A3, right-click to open a context menu and choose Format Cells. - - - The Format Cells dialog appears. On the Numbers tab, the "Number" category will appear already highlighted. The format is set to "General", which causes the result of a calculation containing date entries to be displayed as a date. To display the result as a number, set the number format to "-1,234" and close the dialog with the OK button. - - - The number of days between today's date and the specified date is displayed in cell A3. - - - Experiment with some additional formulas: in A4 enter =A3*24 to calculate the hours, in A5 enter =A4*60 for the minutes, and in A6 enter =A5*60 for seconds. Press the Enter key after each formula. - - - The time since your date of birth will be calculated and displayed in the various units. The values are calculated as of the exact moment when you entered the last formula and pressed the Enter key. This value is not automatically updated, although "Now" continuously changes. In the Tools menu, the menu item Cell Contents - AutoCalculate is normally active; however, automatic calculation does not apply to the function NOW. This ensures that your computer is not solely occupied with updating the sheet. -
- -
- + + +Calculating With Dates and Times +In $[officename] Calc, you can perform calculations with current date and time values. As an example, to find out exactly how old you are in seconds or hours, follow the following steps: + + + + In a spreadsheet, enter your birthday in cell A1. + + + Enter the following formula in cell A3: =NOW()-A1 + + + After pressing the Enter key you will see the result in date format. Since the result should show the difference between two dates as a number of days, you must format cell A3 as a number. + + + Place the cursor in cell A3, right-click to open a context menu and choose Format Cells. + + + The Format Cells dialog appears. On the Numbers tab, the "Number" category will appear already highlighted. The format is set to "General", which causes the result of a calculation containing date entries to be displayed as a date. To display the result as a number, set the number format to "-1,234" and close the dialog with the OK button. + + + The number of days between today's date and the specified date is displayed in cell A3. + + + Experiment with some additional formulas: in A4 enter =A3*24 to calculate the hours, in A5 enter =A4*60 for the minutes, and in A6 enter =A5*60 for seconds. Press the Enter key after each formula. + + +The time since your date of birth will be calculated and displayed in the various units. The values are calculated as of the exact moment when you entered the last formula and pressed the Enter key. This value is not automatically updated, although "Now" continuously changes. In the Tools menu, the menu item Cell Contents - AutoCalculate is normally active; however, automatic calculation does not apply to the function NOW. This ensures that your computer is not solely occupied with updating the sheet. + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp index 800c2db30f..87212b578f 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Assigning Formats by Formula - /text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp - - - -formats; assigning by formulas - cell formats; assigning by formulas - STYLE function example - cell styles;assigning by formulas - formulas;assigning cell formats -mw deleted "applying;" -Assigning Formats by Formula - - The STYLE() function can be added to an existing formula in a cell. For example, together with the CURRENT function, you can color a cell depending on its value. The formula =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3; "Red"; "Green")) applies the cell style "Red" to cells if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the cell style "Green" is applied. - If you would like to apply a formula to all cells in a selected area, you can use the - Find & Replace dialog. - - - Select all the desired cells. - - - Select the menu command Edit - Find & Replace. - - - For the Search for term, enter: .* - - ".*" is a regular expression that designates the contents of the current cell. - - - Enter the following formula in the Replace with field: =&+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"Red";"Green")) - - The "&" symbol designates the current contents of the Search for field. The line must begin with an equal sign, since it is a formula. It is assumed that the cell styles "Red" and "Green" already exist. - - - Mark the fields Regular expressions and Current selection only. Click Find All. - All cells with contents that were included in the selection are now highlighted. - - - Click - Replace all. - - -
- - -
- + + Assigning Formats by Formula + /text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp + + + + + + + formats; assigning by formulas + cell formats; assigning by formulas + STYLE function example + cell styles;assigning by formulas + formulas;assigning cell formats + +mw deleted "applying;" + +Assigning Formats by Formula +The STYLE() function can be added to an existing formula in a cell. For example, together with the CURRENT function, you can color a cell depending on its value. The formula =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3; "Red"; "Green")) applies the cell style "Red" to cells if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the cell style "Green" is applied. +If you would like to apply a formula to all cells in a selected area, you can use the Find & Replace dialog. + + + + Select all the desired cells. + + + Select the menu command Edit - Find & Replace. + + + For the Search for term, enter: .* + ".*" is a regular expression that designates the contents of the current cell. + + + Enter the following formula in the Replace with field: =&+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"Red";"Green")) + The "&" symbol designates the current contents of the Search for field. The line must begin with an equal sign, since it is a formula. It is assumed that the cell styles "Red" and "Green" already exist. + + + Mark the fields Regular expressions and Current selection only. Click Find All. + All cells with contents that were included in the selection are now highlighted. + + + Click Replace all. + + + +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp b/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp index 36ba3ebd19..5bf8bb63f2 100644 --- a/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp +++ b/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Entering a Number with Leading Zeros - /text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp - - - -zero values; entering leading zeros - numbers; with leading zeros - leading zeros - integers with leading zeros - cells; changing text/number formats - formats; changing text/number - text in cells; changing to numbers - converting;text with leading zeros, into numbers -UFI: inserted "converting;text to numbers"mw changed "converting;" and deleted "numbers,changing..." -Entering a Number with Leading Zeros - -
- There are various ways to enter integers starting with a zero: - - - Enter the number as text. The easiest way is to enter the number starting with an apostrophe (for example, '0987). The apostrophe will not appear in the cell, and the number will be formatted as text. Because it is in text format, however, you cannot calculate with this number. - - - Format a cell with a number format such as \0000. This format can be assigned in the Format code field under the Format - Cells - Numbers tab, and defines the cell display as "always put a zero first and then the integer, having at least three places, and filled with zeros at the left if less than three digits". - - - - If you want to apply a numerical format to a column of numbers in text format (for example, text "000123" becomes number "123"), do the following: - - - Select the column in which the digits are found in text format. Set the cell format in that column as "Number". - - - Choose Edit - Find & Replace - - - - In the Search for box, enter ^[0-9] - - - - In the Replace with box, enter & - - - - Check Regular expressions - - - - Check Current selection only - - - - Click Replace All - - - -
-
- - -
- + + Entering a Number with Leading Zeros + /text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp + + + + + + + zero values; entering leading zeros + numbers; with leading zeros + leading zeros + integers with leading zeros + cells; changing text/number formats + formats; changing text/number + text in cells; changing to numbers + converting;text with leading zeros, into numbers + +UFI: inserted "converting;text to numbers"mw changed "converting;" and deleted "numbers,changing..." + +Entering a Number with Leading Zeros + +
+There are various ways to enter integers starting with a zero: + + + + Enter the number as text. The easiest way is to enter the number starting with an apostrophe (for example, '0987). The apostrophe will not appear in the cell, and the number will be formatted as text. Because it is in text format, however, you cannot calculate with this number. + + + Format a cell with a number format such as \0000. This format can be assigned in the Format code field under the Format - Cells - Numbers tab, and defines the cell display as "always put a zero first and then the integer, having at least three places, and filled with zeros at the left if less than three digits". + + +If you want to apply a numerical format to a column of numbers in text format (for example, text "000123" becomes number "123"), do the following: + + + + Select the column in which the digits are found in text format. Set the cell format in that column as "Number". + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace + + + In the Search for box, enter ^[0-9] + + + In the Replace with box, enter & + + + Check Regular expressions + + + Check Current selection only + + + Click Replace All + + +
+ +
+ + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp index 4f642f299a..6bc4273319 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - -Opening Documents -/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp - + + Opening Documents + /text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp + + -opening; documents -documents; opening -files; opening -loading; documents -spreadsheets;creating/opening -presentations;creating/opening -FTP; opening documents -new documents -empty documents -text documents;creating/opening -drawings; creating/opening -HTML documents; new -formulas; new -mw changed "tables;..." to "spreadsheets;..."mw made one entry out of two for "spreadsheets;", "presentations;" and "text (documents);" -Opening Documents - -Opening an existing document + + + opening; documents + documents; opening + files; opening + loading; documents + spreadsheets;creating/opening + presentations;creating/opening + FTP; opening documents + new documents + empty documents + text documents;creating/opening + drawings; creating/opening + HTML documents; new + formulas; new + +mw changed "tables;..." to "spreadsheets;..."mw made one entry out of two for "spreadsheets;", "presentations;" and "text (documents);" + +Opening Documents + +Opening an existing document + - -Do one of the following: -Choose File - Open - -Click the Open icon on the Standard toolbar -Press CommandCtrl+O -The Open dialog appears. - - -Select the file you want to open and click Open. - + + Do one of the following: + Choose File - Open + Click the Open icon on the Standard toolbar + Press Command +Ctrl+O + The Open dialog appears. + + + Select the file you want to open and click Open. + -Restrict Files to Display -To restrict the display of files in the Open dialog to a certain type select the corresponding File type from the list. Select All Files to display all files. -Cursor Position -In general, all documents open with the cursor at the start of the document. -One exception appears when the author of a Writer text document saves and reopens a document: The cursor will be at the same position where it has been when the document was saved. This only works when the name of the author was entered in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data. + +Restrict Files to Display +To restrict the display of files in the Open dialog to a certain type select the corresponding File type from the list. Select All Files to display all files. + +Cursor Position +In general, all documents open with the cursor at the start of the document. +One exception appears when the author of a Writer text document saves and reopens a document: The cursor will be at the same position where it has been when the document was saved. This only works when the name of the author was entered in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data. + - -Press Shift+F5 to set the cursor to the last saved position. - + + Press Shift+F5 to set the cursor to the last saved position. + -Opening an Empty Document -Click the New icon on the Standard bar or choose File - New. This opens a document of the document type specified. -If you click the arrow next to the New icon, a submenu opens in which you can select another document type. -System File Dialogs or %PRODUCTNAME Dialogs -On most operating systems, you can choose to use the system file dialogs or %PRODUCTNAME dialogs. + +Opening an Empty Document +Click the New icon on the Standard bar or choose File - New. This opens a document of the document type specified. +If you click the arrow next to the New icon, a submenu opens in which you can select another document type. + +System File Dialogs or %PRODUCTNAME Dialogs +On most operating systems, you can choose to use the system file dialogs or %PRODUCTNAME dialogs. + - -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General to switch the type of open/save dialogs. - - -The %PRODUCTNAME dialogs support file download and upload using secure https connections. -Opening Files from a Web Server -You can enter a URL in the File name box of the Open dialogs. The URL must start with file:/// or ftp:// or http://. -If you use the %PRODUCTNAME dialog, you can use the https:// prefix for a secure connection, and you can save a document on the web server. + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General to switch the type of open/save dialogs. + +The %PRODUCTNAME dialogs support file download and upload using secure https connections. + +Opening Files from a Web Server +You can enter a URL in the File name box of the Open dialogs. The URL must start with file:/// or ftp:// or http://. +If you use the %PRODUCTNAME dialog, you can use the https:// prefix for a secure connection, and you can save a document on the web server. -When you open a file by a URL from the Windows file dialog, Windows will open a local copy of the file, located in the Internet Explorer cache. The %PRODUCTNAME file dialog opens a local copy of the file in the system's temp folder. +When you open a file by a URL from the Windows file dialog, Windows will open a local copy of the file, located in the Internet Explorer cache. The %PRODUCTNAME file dialog opens a local copy of the file in the system's temp folder. +
-File - Open +File - Open
- + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp b/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp index 99a5fd0b08..5f4b33ba89 100644 --- a/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp +++ b/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ - - - + +--> - - - -General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME -/text/shared/guide/main.xhp - + + General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME + /text/shared/guide/main.xhp + + -instructions; general + + + instructions; general -General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME - -Opening and Saving Documents and Templates + + +General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME + +Opening and Saving Documents and Templates @@ -46,7 +47,8 @@ - + + @@ -55,10 +57,12 @@ - + + -Using Windows, Menus and Icons + +Using Windows, Menus and Icons @@ -67,28 +71,34 @@ -Accessibility + +Accessibility - + + - + + - + + - + + -Copying Data by Drag and Drop or Menu Commands + +Copying Data by Drag and Drop or Menu Commands @@ -100,12 +110,13 @@ -Data Sources -Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME -Table Wizard -Query Wizard -Forms Wizard -Report Wizard + +Data Sources +Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +Table Wizard +Query Wizard +Forms Wizard +Report Wizard @@ -116,7 +127,8 @@ -Recording Changes (Revision Marking) + +Recording Changes (Revision Marking) @@ -124,10 +136,11 @@ -Configuring and Modifying %PRODUCTNAME - + +Configuring and Modifying %PRODUCTNAME - + + @@ -139,26 +152,30 @@ - + + -Charts + +Charts -Miscellaneous -General Terminology -Internet Terminology + +Miscellaneous +General Terminology +Internet Terminology - + + @@ -188,4 +205,5 @@ - + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp b/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp index 4d57308fdc..0691c9b320 100644 --- a/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp +++ b/source/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,5 @@ - - - + +--> - - - -Brackets -/text/smath/01/03091508.xhp - + + Brackets + /text/smath/01/03091508.xhp + + -brackets; reference list + + + brackets; reference list -Brackets - + + +Brackets + - - -Typed command(s) - - -Symbol in Elements Window - - -Meaning - - - - - -(...) - - - - -Icon - - - -Normal round left and right bracket - - - - - -[...] - - - - -Icon - - - -Left and right square bracket - - - - - -ldbracket ... rdbracket - - - - -Icon - - - -Left and right square double bracket - - - - - -lline ... rline - - - - -Icon - - - -Left and right vertical line - - - - - -ldline ... rdline - - - - -Icon - - - -Left and right double vertical lines - - - - - -lbrace ... rbrace - - - - -Icon - - - -Left and right curly brackets, set bracket - - - - - -langle ... rangle - - - - -Icon - - - -Left and right pointed bracket - - - - - -langle ... mline ... rangle - - - - -Icon - - - -Left and right pointed operator bracket - - - - - -{...} - - - - -Icon - - - -Left and right group bracket. They are not displayed in the document and do not take up any room. - - - - - -left( ... right) - - - - -Icon - - - -Brackets, scalable - - - - - -left[ ... right] - - - - -Icon - - - -Square brackets, scalable - - - - - -left ldbracket ... right rdbracket - - - - -Icon - - - -Double square brackets, scalable - - - - - -left lbrace ... right rbrace - - - - -Icon - - - -Braces, scalable - - - - - -left lline ... right rline - - - - -Icon - - - -Single lines, scalable - - - - - -left ldline ... right rdline - - - - -Icon - - - -Double lines, scalable - - - - - -left angle ... right angle - - - - -Icon - - - -Angle brackets, scalable - - - - - -left langle ... mline ... right rangle - - - - -Icon - - - -Scalable left and right pointed operator bracket - - - - - -overbrace - - - - -Icon - - - -Scalable curly set bracket on top - - - - - -underbrace - - - - -Icon - - - -Scalable curly set bracket below - - - - - -lfloor ... rfloor - - - - -Left and right line with lower edges - - - - - -lceil ... rceil - - - - -Left and right line with upper edges - - - - - -\lbrace \rbrace or \{ \} - - - - -Left curly bracket or right curly bracket - - - - - -\( \) - - - - -Left and right round bracket - - - - - -\[ \] - - - - -Left and right square bracket - - - - - -\langle \rangle - - - - -Left and right pointed bracket - - - - - -\lline \rline - - - - -Left and right vertical line - - - - - -\ldline \rdline - - - - -Left and right double line - - - - - -\lfloor \rfloor - - - - -Left and right line with lower edges - - - - - -\lceil \rceil - - - - -Left and right line with upper edges - - - - - -none - - - - -Qualifier to suppress one bracket, as in right none - - - + + + Typed command(s) + + + Symbol in Elements Window + + + Meaning + + + + + (...) + + + Icon + + + Normal round left and right bracket + + + + + [...] + + + Icon + + + Left and right square bracket + + + + + ldbracket ... rdbracket + + + Icon + + + Left and right square double bracket + + + + + lline ... rline + + + Icon + + + Left and right vertical line + + + + + ldline ... rdline + + + Icon + + + Left and right double vertical lines + + + + + lbrace ... rbrace + + + Icon + + + Left and right curly brackets, set bracket + + + + + langle ... rangle + + + Icon + + + Left and right pointed bracket + + + + + langle ... mline ... rangle + + + Icon + + + Left and right pointed operator bracket + + + + + {...} + + + Icon + + + Left and right group bracket. They are not displayed in the document and do not take up any room. + + + + + left( ... right) + + + Icon + + + Brackets, scalable + + + + + left[ ... right] + + + Icon + + + Square brackets, scalable + + + + + left ldbracket ... right rdbracket + + + Icon + + + Double square brackets, scalable + + + + + left lbrace ... right rbrace + + + Icon + + + Braces, scalable + + + + + left lline ... right rline + + + Icon + + + Single lines, scalable + + + + + left ldline ... right rdline + + + Icon + + + Double lines, scalable + + + + + left angle ... right angle + + + Icon + + + Angle brackets, scalable + + + + + left langle ... mline ... right rangle + + + Icon + + + Scalable left and right pointed operator bracket + + + + + overbrace + + + Icon + + + Scalable curly set bracket on top + + + + + underbrace + + + Icon + + + Scalable curly set bracket below + + + + + lfloor ... rfloor + + + + + Left and right line with lower edges + + + + + lceil ... rceil + + + + + Left and right line with upper edges + + + + + \lbrace \rbrace or \{ \} + + + + + Left curly bracket or right curly bracket + + + + + \( \) + + + + + Left and right round bracket + + + + + \[ \] + + + + + Left and right square bracket + + + + + \langle \rangle + + + + + Left and right pointed bracket + + + + + \lline \rline + + + + + Left and right vertical line + + + + + \ldline \rdline + + + + + Left and right double line + + + + + \lfloor \rfloor + + + + + Left and right line with lower edges + + + + + \lceil \rceil + + + + + Left and right line with upper edges + + + + + none + + + + + Qualifier to suppress one bracket, as in right none + +
+ +
- + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp b/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp index 02db1dc188..ddca848893 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp @@ -39,8 +39,7 @@ When you delete a paragraph mark, the paragraph that is merged takes on the formatting of the paragraph that the cursor is in. -To specify which non-printing characters are displayed, choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display of area. +To specify which non-printing characters are displayed, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display of area. - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp index 90bd9f013f..0d5284dfb8 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Positioning Objects - /text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp - - - -objects;anchoring options - positioning;objects (guide) - anchors;options - frames;anchoring options - pictures;anchoring options - centering;images on HTML pages + + Positioning Objects + /text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp + + + + + + + objects;anchoring options + positioning;objects (guide) + anchors;options + frames;anchoring options + pictures;anchoring options + centering;images on HTML pages -Positioning Objects - - You can use anchors to position an object, graphic, or frame in a document. An anchored item remains in place, or moves when you modify the document. The following anchoring options are available: - - - - Anchoring - - - Effect - - - - - As character - - - Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased. - To center an image on an HTML page, insert the image, anchor it "as character", then center the paragraph. - - - - - To character - - - Anchors the selected item to a character. - - - - - To paragraph - - - Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph. - - - - - To page - - - Anchors the selected item to the current page. - - - - - To frame - - - Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame. - - -
- When you insert an object, graphic, or frame, an anchor icon appears where the item is anchored. You can position an anchored item by dragging the item to another location. To change the anchoring options of an item, right-click the item, and then choose an option from the Anchor - submenu. -
- -
- + +Positioning Objects +You can use anchors to position an object, graphic, or frame in a document. An anchored item remains in place, or moves when you modify the document. The following anchoring options are available: + + + + + Anchoring + + + Effect + + + + + As character + + + Anchors the selected item as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected item is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the item is increased. + To center an image on an HTML page, insert the image, anchor it "as character", then center the paragraph. + + + + + To character + + + Anchors the selected item to a character. + + + + + To paragraph + + + Anchors the selected item to the current paragraph. + + + + + To page + + + Anchors the selected item to the current page. + + + + + To frame + + + Anchors the selected item to the surrounding frame. + + +
+ +When you insert an object, graphic, or frame, an anchor icon appears where the item is anchored. You can position an anchored item by dragging the item to another location. To change the anchoring options of an item, right-click the item, and then choose an option from the Anchor submenu. + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp index 1fdd3f9176..0bdb6ab5f7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Using AutoText - /text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp - - - -AutoText - networks and AutoText directories - lists;AutoText shortcuts - printing;AutoText shortcuts - inserting;text blocks - text blocks - blocks of text + + Using AutoText + /text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp + + + + + + + AutoText + networks and AutoText directories + lists;AutoText shortcuts + printing;AutoText shortcuts + inserting;text blocks + text blocks + blocks of text + -Using AutoText - - In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text. - To To Create an AutoText Entry - - - Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character. - - - Choose - Edit - AutoText. - - - Select the category where you want to store the AutoText. - - - Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. - - - Click the AutoText button, and then choose New. - - - Click the Close button. - - - To Insert an AutoText Entry - - - Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry. - - - Choose Edit - AutoText. - - - Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click - Insert. - - - You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the AutoText - icon on the Insert bar, and then choose an AutoText entry. - To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type fn, and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type dt, and then press F3. - To Print a List of AutoText Entries - - - Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. - - - In the Macro from tree control, select %PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks - AutoText. - - - Select "Main" in the Existing macros in: AutoText list and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. - - - Choose File - Print. - - - Using AutoText in Network Installations - You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network. - For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory. - The paths for the AutoText directories can be edited in the configuration. - Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used. -
- Edit - AutoText - Word Completion -
- - + +Using AutoText +In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text. + +To To Create an AutoText Entry + + + + Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character. + + + Choose Edit - AutoText. + + + Select the category where you want to store the AutoText. + + + Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. + + + Click the AutoText button, and then choose New. + + + Click the Close button. + + + +To Insert an AutoText Entry + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry. + + + Choose Edit - AutoText. + + + Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click Insert. + + +You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the AutoText icon on the Insert bar, and then choose an AutoText entry. +To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type fn, and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type dt, and then press F3. + +To Print a List of AutoText Entries + + + + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic. + + + In the Macro from tree control, select %PRODUCTNAME Macros - Gimmicks - AutoText. + + + Select "Main" in the Existing macros in: AutoText list and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. + + + Choose File - Print. + + + +Using AutoText in Network Installations +You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network. +For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory. +The paths for the AutoText directories can be edited in the configuration. +Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used. + +
+Edit - AutoText +Word Completion +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp index 71babbbd8c..297bcee84d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Calculating in Text Documents - /text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp - - - -calculating; in text - formulas; calculating in text - references;in Writer tables -mw deleted "formula bar in text" -Calculating in Text Documents - - You can insert a calculation directly into a text document or into a text table. - - - Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =. - - - Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, =10000/12, and then press Enter. - - - You can also click the Formula - icon on the Formula Bar, and then choose a function for your formula. - To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell. - - - - - - - + + Calculating in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp + + + + + + + calculating; in text + formulas; calculating in text + references;in Writer tables + +mw deleted "formula bar in text" + +Calculating in Text Documents +You can insert a calculation directly into a text document or into a text table. + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =. + + + Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, =10000/12, and then press Enter. + + +You can also click the Formula icon on the Formula Bar, and then choose a function for your formula. +To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp index c5d146021f..2ca20390ba 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents - /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp - - - -formulas; complex formulas in text - calculating;formulas/mean values -mw reduced "calculating;" entries to one entry -Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents - - You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document. - For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following: - - - Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2. - - - Click the Formula - icon, and choose "Mean" from the Statistical Functions list. - - - Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|). - - - Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. - - - To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document. - - - - - - - - + + Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents + /text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp + + + + + + + formulas; complex formulas in text + calculating;formulas/mean values + +mw reduced "calculating;" entries to one entry + +Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents +You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document. +For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following: + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2. + + + Click the Formula icon, and choose "Mean" from the Statistical Functions list. + + + Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|). + + + Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. + + +To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp index 4dd201a3ce..9414f743e5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Using Captions - /text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp - - - -inserting; captions - captions; inserting and editing - editing;captions - objects; captioning - tables; labeling - frames; labeling - charts; labeling - text frames; labeling - draw objects; inserting captions - legends, see also captions -mw deleted "adding;" - - Using Captions - - In text documents, you can add continuously numbered captions to graphics, tables, frames, and drawing objects. - You can edit the text and the number ranges for different types of captions. - When you add a caption to a picture or to an object, the object and the caption text are placed together in a new frame. When you add a caption to a table, the caption text is inserted as a paragraph next to the table. When you add a caption to a frame, the caption text is added to the text inside the frame, either before or after the existing text. - To move both the object and the caption, drag the frame that contains these items. To update the caption numbering after you move the frame, press F9. - To define a caption proceed as follows: - - - Select the item that you want to add a caption to. - - - Choose Insert - Caption. - - - Select the options that you want, and then click OK. If you want, you can also enter different text in the Category - box, for example Figure. - - - You can edit caption text directly in the document. - A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text. - $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. - - - - - - - - - + + Using Captions + /text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp + + + + + + + inserting; captions + captions; inserting and editing + editing;captions + objects; captioning + tables; labeling + frames; labeling + charts; labeling + text frames; labeling + draw objects; inserting captions + legends, see also captions + +mw deleted "adding;" + + +Using Captions +In text documents, you can add continuously numbered captions to graphics, tables, frames, and drawing objects. +You can edit the text and the number ranges for different types of captions. +When you add a caption to a picture or to an object, the object and the caption text are placed together in a new frame. When you add a caption to a table, the caption text is inserted as a paragraph next to the table. When you add a caption to a frame, the caption text is added to the text inside the frame, either before or after the existing text. +To move both the object and the caption, drag the frame that contains these items. To update the caption numbering after you move the frame, press F9. +To define a caption proceed as follows: + + + + Select the item that you want to add a caption to. + + + Choose Insert - Caption. + + + Select the options that you want, and then click OK. If you want, you can also enter different text in the Category box, for example Figure. + + +You can edit caption text directly in the document. +A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text. +$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp index b37aecbbb9..43334e4259 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -47,21 +47,16 @@ Choose Insert - Caption. - Select a caption title from the Category - box, and select a numbering style in the Numbering - box.
You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the Caption - box. + Select a caption title from the Category box, and select a numbering style in the Numbering box.
You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the Caption box. Click Options. - In the Level - box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number. + In the Level box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number. - Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the - Separator box, and then click OK. + Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the Separator box, and then click OK. In the Caption dialog, click OK. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp index 93e1a38416..7b4c8915ce 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page - /text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp - - - -headers; inserting - footers; inserting - page styles; changing from selection - new page styles from selection -mw deleted "creating;" -Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page - - You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it. - For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header. - - - Open a new text document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles icon. - - - Click the New Style from Selection icon and select New Styles from Selection from the submenu. - - - Type a name for the page in the Style name - box, and then click OK. - - - Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page. - - - Choose Insert - Header, and choose the new page style from the list. - - - Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header. - - - Choose Insert - Manual Break. - - - In the Type - area, select Page break and then select “Default” from the Style - box. - - - Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom page style with a different header. - - - - - - - - - + + Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page + /text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp + + + + + + + headers; inserting + footers; inserting + page styles; changing from selection + new page styles from selection + +mw deleted "creating;" + +Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page +You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it. +For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header. + + + + Open a new text document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles icon. + + + Click the New Style from Selection icon and select New Styles from Selection from the submenu. + + + Type a name for the page in the Style name box, and then click OK. + + + Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page. + + + Choose Insert - Header, and choose the new page style from the list. + + + Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header. + + + Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + + In the Type area, select Page break and then select “Default” from the Style box. + + + Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom page style with a different header. + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp index 643ebbf42f..a639c01e29 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Outline Numbering - /text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp - - - -outlines;numbering - deleting;heading numbers - chapter numbering - headings; numbering/paragraph styles - numbering;headings -MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." and made "outline numbering" a two level entrymw reduced two "headings;" bookmarks to one entry -Outline Numbering - - You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy. - To Add Automatic Numbering to a Heading Style - - - Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering - tab. - - - In the Paragraph Style - box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to. - - - In the - Numbers box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click - OK. - - - To Remove Automatic Outline Numbering From a Heading Paragraph - - - Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number. - - - Press the Backspace key to delete the number. - - - To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Heading - - - Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering - tab. - - - Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. - - - Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the - Level list. - - - Click OK. - - - - - mw inserted new link under "Related topics" and deleted "To rearrange the headings in a text document" + + Outline Numbering + /text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp + + + + + + + outlines;numbering + deleting;heading numbers + chapter numbering + headings; numbering/paragraph styles + numbering;headings + +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." and made "outline numbering" a two level entrymw reduced two "headings;" bookmarks to one entry + +Outline Numbering +You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy. + +To Add Automatic Numbering to a Heading Style + + + + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. + + + In the Paragraph Style box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to. + + + In the Numbers box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click OK. + + + +To Remove Automatic Outline Numbering From a Heading Paragraph + + + + Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number. + + + Press the Backspace key to delete the number. + + + +To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Heading + + + + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. + + + Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. + + + Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the Level list. + + + Click OK. + + + + +mw inserted new link under "Related topics" and deleted "To rearrange the headings in a text document" + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp index c4cd2455a5..4288cca8da 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Conditional Text - /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp - - - -matching conditional text in fields - if-then queries as fields - conditional text; setting up - text; conditional text - defining;conditions + + Conditional Text + /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp + + + + + + + matching conditional text in fields + if-then queries as fields + conditional text; setting up + text; conditional text + defining;conditions -Conditional Text - - You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters. - Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition. - To Define a Conditional Variable - The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. - - - Click "Set variable" in the Type - list. - - - Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example Reminder. - - - Click "Text" in the - Format list. - - - Enter 1 in the Value box, and then click Insert.
The Format list now displays a "General" format. - - - To Define a Condition and the Conditional Text - The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document. - - - Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. - - - Click "Conditional text" in the Type - list. - - - Type Reminder EQ "3" in the Condition - box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three. - The quotation marks enclosing the "3" indicate that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. - - - - - Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box. - - - Click Insert, and then click Close. - - - To Display the Conditional Text - In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3. - - - Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. - - - Replace the number in the Value - box with 3, and then click - Close. - - - If the field does not automatically update, press F9. - - -
- - - - List of conditional operators -
- + + +Conditional Text +You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters. +Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition. + +To Define a Conditional Variable +The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. + + + + Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. + + + Click "Set variable" in the Type list. + + + Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example Reminder. + + + Click "Text" in the Format list. + + + Enter 1 in the Value box, and then click Insert.
The Format list now displays a "General" format. + + + +To Define a Condition and the Conditional Text +The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document. + + + + Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + Type Reminder EQ "3" in the Condition box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three. + The quotation marks enclosing the "3" indicate that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. + + + + + + Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box. + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + +To Display the Conditional Text +In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3. + + + + Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. + + + Replace the number in the Value box with 3, and then click Close. + + + If the field does not automatically update, press F9. + + + +
+ + + +List of conditional operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp index 66392ef9ae..33a2a4a291 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Conditional Text for Page Counts - /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp - - - -page counts - conditional text;page counts + + Conditional Text for Page Counts + /text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp + + + + + + + page counts + conditional text;page counts -Conditional Text for Page Counts - - You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page. - - - Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - Page Count, and then enter a space. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. - - - Click "Conditional text" in the Type - list. - - - Type Page > 1 in the Condition box. - - - Type Pages in the Then box. - - - Type Page in the Else box. - - - Click Insert, and then click Close. - - - - - - - + + +Conditional Text for Page Counts +You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page. + + + + Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - Page Count, and then enter a space. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields, and then click the Functions tab. + + + Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + + Type Page > 1 in the Condition box. + + + Type Pages in the Then box. + + + Type Page in the Else box. + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp index f70d3ccd74..c5f10adc59 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary - /text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp - - - -user-defined dictionaries; removing words from - custom dictionaries; removing words from - deleting;words in user-defined dictionaries -MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." -Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary - - - - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. - - - Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the User-defined - list, and then click Edit. - - - Select the word that you want to delete in the Word list, and then click Delete. - - - - - + + Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary + /text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp + + + + + + + user-defined dictionaries; removing words from + custom dictionaries; removing words from + deleting;words in user-defined dictionaries + +MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." + +Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary + + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. + + + Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the User-defined list, and then click Edit. + + + Select the word that you want to delete in the Word list, and then click Delete. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp index 6b259867c8..49013720ec 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages - /text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp - - - -page styles; left and right pages - blank pages with alternating page styles - empty page with alternating page styles - pages; left and right pages - formatting; even/odd pages - title pages; page styles - First Page page style - Left Page page style - right pages - even/odd pages;formatting -MW made "empty pages;..." and "blank pages;.." to one level entries. -Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages - - - - - -Icon - - - - $[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace. - - -
+ + Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages + /text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp + + + + + + + page styles; left and right pages + blank pages with alternating page styles + empty page with alternating page styles + pages; left and right pages + formatting; even/odd pages + title pages; page styles + First Page page style + Left Page page style + right pages + even/odd pages;formatting + +MW made "empty pages;..." and "blank pages;.." to one level entries. + +Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages + + + + + Icon + + + $[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace. + + +
+ + +To Set Up Alternating Page Styles + + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. + + + Click the Organizer tab. + + + Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. + + + Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + + Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles and Formatting window. + + +To add a header to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Header, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header. +To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Footer, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer. +If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page. + +To Suppress the Printout of Empty Pages +If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF. + + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + + + Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages. + + + +
+ + +Insert Break dialog +
+ - To Set Up Alternating Page Styles - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Styles - icon. - - - In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. - - - Click the Organizer tab. - - - Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. - - - In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. - - - Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. - - - Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles and Formatting window. - - - To add a header to one of the page styles, choose - Insert - Header, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header. - To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose - Insert - Footer, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer. - If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page. - To Suppress the Printout of Empty Pages - If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF. - - - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. - - - Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages. - - -
- - - Insert Break dialog -
- \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp index 6aa0c0548f..485cd12973 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field - /text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp - - - -inserting;date fields - dates;inserting - date fields;fixed/variable - fixed dates - variable dates + + Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field + /text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp + + + + + + + inserting;date fields + dates;inserting + date fields;fixed/variable + fixed dates + variable dates -Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field - - You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields and click the Document tab. - - - Click “Date” in the Type - list and do one of the following: - To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click ”Date” in the Select - list. - To insert the date as a field that does not update, click “Date (fixed)” in the Select - list. - - - - - - - + + +Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field +You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update. + + + + Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields and click the Document tab. + + + Click “Date” in the Type list and do one of the following: + To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click ”Date” in the Select list. + To insert the date as a field that does not update, click “Date (fixed)” in the Select list. + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp index 912d5ad4c6..14aebbcd9d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Adding Input Fields - /text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp - - - -text; input fields - fields; input fields in text - input fields in text - inserting;input fields -MW deleted "adding;" -Adding Input Fields - - An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields - and click the Functions tab. - - - Click “Input field”in the Type list. - - - Click Insert - and type the text for the variable. - - - Click OK. - - - To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press Ctrl+Shift+F9. - - - + + Adding Input Fields + /text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp + + + + + + + text; input fields + fields; input fields in text + input fields in text + inserting;input fields + +MW deleted "adding;" + +Adding Input Fields +An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable. + + + + Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields and click the Functions tab. + + + Click “Input field”in the Type list. + + + Click Insert and type the text for the variable. + + + Click OK. + + +To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press Ctrl+Shift+F9. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp index 460bab484d..b8721564d5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions - /text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp - - - -fields; user data - user data; querying - conditions; user data fields - hiding;text, from specific users - text; hiding from specific users, with conditions - user variables in conditions/fields + + Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions + /text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp + + + + + + + fields; user data + user data; querying + conditions; user data fields + hiding;text, from specific users + text; hiding from specific users, with conditions + user variables in conditions/fields -Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions - - You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators: - - - - Operator - - - Meaning - - - - - == or EQ - - - equals - - - - - != or NEQ - - - is not equal to - - -
- If you want, you can use a condition to hide specific text in your document from a specific user. - - - Select the text in the document that you want to hide. - - - Choose Insert - Section. - - - In the Hide - area, select the Hide check box. - - - In the With Condition box, type user_lastname == "Doe", where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. - - - Click Insert and then save the document. - - - The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator. - The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field: - - - - User variables - - - Meaning - - - - - user_firstname - - - First name - - - - - user_lastname - - - Last name - - - - - user_initials - - - Initials - - - - - user_company - - - Company - - - - - user_street - - - Street - - - - - user_country - - - Country - - - - - user_zipcode - - - Zip Code - - - - - user_city - - - City - - - - - user_title - - - Title - - - - - user_position - - - Position - - - - - user_tel_work - - - Business telephone number - - - - - user_tel_home - - - Home telephone number - - - - - user_fax - - - Fax number - - - - - user_email - - - E-mail address - - - - - user_state - - - State - - -
-
- - - - List of operators -
- +Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions +You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators: + + + + + Operator + + + Meaning + + + + + == or EQ + + + equals + + + + + != or NEQ + + + is not equal to + + +
+ +If you want, you can use a condition to hide specific text in your document from a specific user. + + + + Select the text in the document that you want to hide. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the Hide area, select the Hide check box. + + + In the With Condition box, type user_lastname == "Doe", where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from. + + + Click Insert and then save the document. + + +The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator. +The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field: + + + + + User variables + + + Meaning + + + + + user_firstname + + + First name + + + + + user_lastname + + + Last name + + + + + user_initials + + + Initials + + + + + user_company + + + Company + + + + + user_street + + + Street + + + + + user_country + + + Country + + + + + user_zipcode + + + Zip Code + + + + + user_city + + + City + + + + + user_title + + + Title + + + + + user_position + + + Position + + + + + user_tel_work + + + Business telephone number + + + + + user_tel_home + + + Home telephone number + + + + + user_fax + + + Fax number + + + + + user_email + + + E-mail address + + + + + user_state + + + State + + +
+ + +
+ + + +List of operators +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp index b5b40129f1..e580fe2e5c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages - /text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp - - - -pages; continuation pages - next page number in footers - continuation pages - page numbers; continuation pages + + Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages + /text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp + + + + + + + pages; continuation pages + next page number in footers + continuation pages + page numbers; continuation pages -Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages - - You can easily insert the page number of the next page in a footer by using a field. - The page number is only displayed if the following page exists. - - - Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. - - - Place the cursor in the footer and choose Insert - Fields - More Fields. - - - In the Fields dialog, click the Document tab. - - - Click 'Page' in the Type list and 'Next page' in the Select list. - - - Click a numbering style in the Format - list. - If you select 'Text' in the Format list, only the text that you enter in the Value box is displayed in the field. - - - Click Insert to insert the field with the page number. - - - - - + + +Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages +You can easily insert the page number of the next page in a footer by using a field. +The page number is only displayed if the following page exists. + + + + Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + + + Place the cursor in the footer and choose Insert - Fields - More Fields. + + + In the Fields dialog, click the Document tab. + + + Click 'Page' in the Type list and 'Next page' in the Select list. + + + Click a numbering style in the Format list. + If you select 'Text' in the Format list, only the text that you enter in the Value box is displayed in the field. + + + Click Insert to insert the field with the page number. + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp index d6286e962c..e53dbe20a9 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> - - Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes - /text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp - - - -endnotes;inserting and editing - inserting;footnotes/endnotes - deleting;footnotes - editing;footnotes/endnotes - organizing;footnotes - footnotes; inserting and editing -MW deleted "removing;.." -Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes - - Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes and endnotes. - To Insert a Footnote or Endnote - - - Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note. - - - Choose Insert - Footnote/Endnote. - - - In the Numbering area, select the format that you want to use. If you select Character, click the Choose button and select the character that you want to use for the footnote. - - - In the Type - area, select Footnote - or Endnote. - - - Click OK. - - - Type the note. - - - - - - -Icon - - - - You can also insert footnotes by clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon on the Insert toolbar. - - -
+ + Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes + /text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp + + + + + + + endnotes;inserting and editing + inserting;footnotes/endnotes + deleting;footnotes + editing;footnotes/endnotes + organizing;footnotes + footnotes; inserting and editing + +MW deleted "removing;.." + +Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes +Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes and endnotes. + +To Insert a Footnote or Endnote + + + + Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note. + + + Choose Insert - Footnote/Endnote. + + + In the Numbering area, select the format that you want to use. If you select Character, click the Choose button and select the character that you want to use for the footnote. + + + In the Type area, select Footnote or Endnote. + + + Click OK. + + + Type the note. + + + + + + + Icon + + + You can also insert footnotes by clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon on the Insert toolbar. + + +
+ + +To Edit a Footnote or Endnote + + + + The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document. + + + + + To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text. + + + To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press Command+T +F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. + + + To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp. + + + + + To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote/Endnote. + + + To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes. + + + To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. + + + To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text. + + + + - To Edit a Footnote or Endnote - - - The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document. - - - - - To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text. - - - To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press Command+TF11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. - - - To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp. - - - - - To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote/Endnote. - - - To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes/Endnotes. - - - To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. - - - To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text. - - - - - \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp index aac9a97ee6..7d6ec522bd 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Spacing Between Footnotes - /text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp - - - -spacing; endnotes/footnotes - endnotes; spacing - footnotes; spacing - borders;for footnotes/endnotes - lines;footnotes/endnotes + + Spacing Between Footnotes + /text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp + + + + + + + spacing; endnotes/footnotes + endnotes; spacing + footnotes; spacing + borders;for footnotes/endnotes + lines;footnotes/endnotes -Spacing Between Footnotes - - If you want to increase the spacing between footnote or endnote texts, you can add a top and bottom border to the corresponding paragraph style. - - - Click in a footnote or endnote. - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - - Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose Modify. - - - Click the Borders tab. - - - In the Default - area, click the Set Top and Bottom Borders Only icon. - - - In the Line area, click a line in the Style - list. - - - Select "White" in the Color - box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color. - - - In the Spacing to contents area, clear the Synchronize check box. - - - Enter a value in the Top - and Bottom - boxes. - - - Click OK. - - - - - Format - Paragraph - Borders - + + +Spacing Between Footnotes +If you want to increase the spacing between footnote or endnote texts, you can add a top and bottom border to the corresponding paragraph style. + + + + Click in a footnote or endnote. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose Modify. + + + Click the Borders tab. + + + In the Default area, click the Set Top and Bottom Borders Only icon. + + + In the Line area, click a line in the Style list. + + + Select "White" in the Color box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color. + + + In the Spacing to contents area, clear the Synchronize check box. + + + Enter a value in the Top and Bottom boxes. + + + Click OK. + + + + +Format - Paragraph - Borders + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp index b53336556f..b70d8f893a 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments - /text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp - - - -Navigator;master documents - master documents;creating/editing/exporting - subdocuments;creating/editing/removing - removing;subdocuments - indexes; master documents -MW created 4 new index entries. 2 index entries were taken from globaldoc.xhp.MW made one index entry out of 2 "subdocuments;" entries -Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments -MW: this is a new guide created from splitting globaldoc.xhp -A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. - To Create a Master Document - - - Do one of the following: - - + + Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments + /text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp + + + + + + + Navigator;master documents + master documents;creating/editing/exporting + subdocuments;creating/editing/removing + removing;subdocuments + indexes; master documents + +MW created 4 new index entries. 2 index entries were taken from globaldoc.xhp.MW made one index entry out of 2 "subdocuments;" entries +Working with Master Documents and SubdocumentsMW: this is a new guide created from splitting globaldoc.xhp +A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. +To Create a Master Document + + + + Do one of the following: + + - -Choose File - New - Master Document. - + + Choose File - New - Master Document. + + + Open an existing document and choose File - Send - Create Master Document. + - -Open an existing document and choose File - Send - Create Master Document. - + + + If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a Text entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after having edited an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments. + + + In the Navigator for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the Insert icon, and do one of the following: + + + + To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose File, locate the file that you want to include, and then click OK. + + + To create a new subdocument, choose New Document, type a name for the file, and then click Save. + + + To insert some text between subdocuments, choose Text. Then type the text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + + + + Choose File - Save. + + +To Edit a Master Document +Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document. - - - If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a Text - entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after having edited an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments. - - - In the Navigator for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the Insert - icon, and do one of the following: - - + + + To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator. + - -To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose File, locate the file that you want to include, and then click OK. - - - -To create a new subdocument, choose New Document, type a name for the file, and then click Save. - - -To insert some text between subdocuments, choose Text. Then type the text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 - + + To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed. + + + + + To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + + + + + To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the Move down or Move up icon. + + + + + To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. + + + + + + Icon + + + To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon. + + +
+ +When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the Format - (Object type) - Type tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the Horizontal and Vertical list boxes. + +To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page + + + + Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1". + + + In the master document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. + + + Click the Text Flow tab. + + + In the Breaks area, select Insert, and then select “Page”in the Type box. + + + If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. + + + Click OK. + + + +To Export a Master Document as a %PRODUCTNAME Text Document + + + + Choose File - Export. + + + In the File format list, select a text document file format and click Export. + +The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use Format - Sections to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections. +
+ +Navigator in master mode +
+ - - - Choose File - Save. - - - To Edit a Master Document - Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document. - - - To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator. - - - - - To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed. - - - - - To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 - - - - - To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the Move down or Move up - icon. - - - - - To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. - - - - - - -Icon - - - - To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon. - - -
- - When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the Format - (Object type) - Type tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the Horizontal and Vertical list boxes. - To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page - - - Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1". - - - In the master document, choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. - - - Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. - - - Click the Text Flow - tab. - - - In the Breaks - area, select Insert, and then select “Page”in the Type - box. - - - If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. - - - Click OK. - - - To Export a Master Document as a %PRODUCTNAME Text Document - - - Choose File - Export. - - - In the File format list, select a text document file format and click Export. - - - The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use Format - Sections to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections. -
- - Navigator in master mode -
- - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp index 32ece1e320..eb787e97a4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - About Headers and Footers - /text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp - - - -headers;about - footers;about - HTML documents; headers and footers + + About Headers and Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp + + + + + + + headers;about + footers;about + HTML documents; headers and footers -About Headers and Footers - - Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert Fields, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document. - The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. - - - To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. - - - To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. - - - - - You can also choose Format - Page, click the Header or Footer - tab, and then select Header on - or Footer on. Clear the Same content left/right check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages. - - - - - To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different Page Styles, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear. - - - Headers and Footers in HTML Documents - Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. -
- - - - - Page Styles -
- + + +About Headers and Footers +Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert Fields, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document. +The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. + + + + To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + + + You can also choose Format - Page, click the Header or Footer tab, and then select Header on or Footer on. Clear the Same content left/right check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages. + + + + + To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different Page Styles, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear. + + +Headers and Footers in HTML Documents +Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. + +
+ + + + +Page Styles +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp index 224ef8e95b..183a2fe16f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Defining Different Headers and Footers - /text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp - - - -headers;defining for left and right pages - footers;defining for left and right pages - page styles; changing - defining; headers/footers - mirrored page layout + + Defining Different Headers and Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp + + + + + + + headers;defining for left and right pages + footers;defining for left and right pages + page styles; changing + defining; headers/footers + mirrored page layout -Defining Different Headers and Footers - - You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as First page, Left page and Right page, or you can create a custom page style. - You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose Format - Page, click the - Page tab, and in the - Layout settings area, choose “Mirrored” in the - Page layout box. - For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document. - - - Open a new text document. - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting and click the Page Styles icon in the Styles and Formatting window. - - - Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. - - - In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header - tab. - - - Select - Header on and click the Organizer tab. - - - In the Next Style - box, select "Left Page". - - - Click OK. - - - In the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. - - - In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header - tab. - - - Select - Header on and click the Organizer tab. - - - In the Next Style - box, select "Right Page". - - - Click OK. - - - Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page. - - - Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. - - - - - - - - + + +Defining Different Headers and Footers +You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as First page, Left page and Right page, or you can create a custom page style. +You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose Format - Page, click the Page tab, and in the Layout settings area, choose “Mirrored” in the Page layout box. +For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document. + + + + Open a new text document. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting and click the Page Styles icon in the Styles and Formatting window. + + + Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + + In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. + + + Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + + In the Next Style box, select "Left Page". + + + Click OK. + + + In the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + + In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. + + + Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + + In the Next Style box, select "Right Page". + + + Click OK. + + + Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page. + + + Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp index 4931018379..89aab28197 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer - /text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp - - - -running titles in headers - floating titles in headers - headers; chapter information - chapter names in headers - names; chapter names in headers + + Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer + /text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp + + + + + + + running titles in headers + floating titles in headers + headers; chapter information + chapter names in headers + names; chapter names in headers -Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer - - Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the outline numbering options for the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles. - To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles - - - Choose Tools - Outline Numbering. - - - In the Style - box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, "Heading 1". - - - Select the numbering style for the chapter titles in the Number - box, for example, "1,2,3...". - - - Type "Chapter" followed by a space in the Before - box. - - - Enter a space in the After - box. - - - Click OK. - - - To Insert the Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer - - - Apply the paragraph style that you defined for chapter titles to the chapter headings in your document. - - - Choose Insert - Header - or Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. - - - Click in the header or footer. - - - Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields and click the - Document tab. - - - - - Click "Chapter" in the Type - list and "Chapter number and name" in the Format - list. - - - Click Insert and then click Close. - - - The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number. - - - - - - + + +Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer +Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the outline numbering options for the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles. + +To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles + + + + Choose Tools - Outline Numbering. + + + In the Style box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, "Heading 1". + + + Select the numbering style for the chapter titles in the Number box, for example, "1,2,3...". + + + Type "Chapter" followed by a space in the Before box. + + + Enter a space in the After box. + + + Click OK. + + + +To Insert the Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer + + + + Apply the paragraph style that you defined for chapter titles to the chapter headings in your document. + + + Choose Insert - Header or Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + + Click in the header or footer. + + + Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields and click the Document tab. + + + + + + Click "Chapter" in the Type list and "Chapter number and name" in the Format list. + + + Click Insert and then click Close. + + +The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp index e1e9923371..797c227b80 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Formatting Headers or Footers - /text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp - - - -inserting;lines under headers/above footers - lines; under headers/above footers - headers;formatting - footers;formatting - shadows;headers/footers - borders;for headers/footers -MW changed "inserting;" -Formatting Headers or Footers - - You can apply direct formatting to the text in a header or footer. You can also adjust the spacing of the text relative to the header or footer frame or apply a border to the header or footer. - - - Choose Format - Page - and select the Header - or Footer - tab. - - - Set the spacing options that you want to use. - - - To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click More. The Border/Background - dialog opens. - - + + Formatting Headers or Footers + /text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp + + - - -To add a separator line between the header or the footer and the content of the page, click the bottom edge of the square in the Line arrangement area. Click a line style in the Style box. - + - -To adjust the spacing between the content of the header or footer and the line, clear the Synchronize box, and then enter a value in the Bottom box. - - + + inserting;lines under headers/above footers + lines; under headers/above footers + headers;formatting + footers;formatting + shadows;headers/footers + borders;for headers/footers + +MW changed "inserting;" +Formatting Headers or Footers +You can apply direct formatting to the text in a header or footer. You can also adjust the spacing of the text relative to the header or footer frame or apply a border to the header or footer. + + + Choose Format - Page and select the Header or Footer tab. + + + Set the spacing options that you want to use. + + + To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click More. The Border/Background dialog opens. + + + + + + To add a separator line between the header or the footer and the content of the page, click the bottom edge of the square in the Line arrangement area. Click a line style in the Style box. + + + To adjust the spacing between the content of the header or footer and the line, clear the Synchronize box, and then enter a value in the Bottom box. + + + + + + + - - - - - - - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp index 493d49be8f..4087575b97 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator - /text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp - - - -hyperlinks; inserting from Navigator - inserting; hyperlinks from Navigator - cross-references; inserting with Navigator - Navigator;inserting hyperlinks -mw deleted "adding;" -Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator - - You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other %PRODUCTNAME documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in %PRODUCTNAME, you are taken to the cross-referenced item. - - - Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference. - - - On the Standard bar, click the Navigator icon. - - - Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon, and ensure that Insert as Hyperlink - is selected. - - - In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference. - - - In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink. - - - Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document. - - - The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink. - - - - + + Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator + /text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp + + + + + + + hyperlinks; inserting from Navigator + inserting; hyperlinks from Navigator + cross-references; inserting with Navigator + Navigator;inserting hyperlinks + +mw deleted "adding;" + +Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator +You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other %PRODUCTNAME documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in %PRODUCTNAME, you are taken to the cross-referenced item. + + + + Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference. + + + On the Standard bar, click the Navigator icon. + + + Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon, and ensure that Insert as Hyperlink is selected. + + + In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink. + + + Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document. + + +The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp index afc1d83aa5..f8639e5939 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries - /text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp - - - -indexes; editing or deleting entries - tables of contents; editing or deleting entries - deleting;entries of indexes/tables of contents - editing;table/index entries + + Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries + /text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp + + + + + + + indexes; editing or deleting entries + tables of contents; editing or deleting entries + deleting;entries of indexes/tables of contents + editing;table/index entries -Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries - - Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose View - and ensure that Field Shadings - is selected. - - - Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document. - - - Choose Edit - Index Entry, and do one of the following: - - - - - -To change the entry, enter different text in the Entry box. - - -To remove the entry, click Delete. - +Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries +Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose View and ensure that Field Shadings is selected. + + + + Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document. + + + Choose Edit - Index Entry, and do one of the following: + + + + To change the entry, enter different text in the Entry box. + + + To remove the entry, click Delete. + +To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the Edit Index Entry dialog. + + + + + + + + + + - To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the Edit Index Entry dialog. - - - - - - - - - - - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp index 32507abd86..4326fe12d0 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Creating Alphabetical Indexes - /text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp - - - -concordance files;indexes - indexes; alphabetical indexes - alphabetical indexes + + Creating Alphabetical Indexes + /text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp + + + + + + + concordance files;indexes + indexes; alphabetical indexes + alphabetical indexes -Creating Alphabetical Indexes - - - - Click in your document where you want to insert the index. - - - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. - - - On the Index/Table tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. - - - If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options - area, click the File button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file. - - - Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. - - - Click OK. - - - To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index/Table. - - - - Creating a concordance file - - - - - - - - - + + +Creating Alphabetical Indexes + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert the index. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + + + On the Index/Table tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. + + + If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options area, click the File button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file. + + + Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. + + + Click OK. + + + To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index/Table. + + + +Creating a concordance file + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp index 464fd2041a..67fe478095 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Creating a Bibliography - /text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp - - - -indexes;creating bibliographies - databases;creating bibliographies - bibliographies - entries;bibliographies - storing bibliographic information + + Creating a Bibliography + /text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp + + + + + + + indexes;creating bibliographies + databases;creating bibliographies + bibliographies + entries;bibliographies + storing bibliographic information -Creating a Bibliography - - A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document. - Storing Bibliographic Information - $[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document. - To Store Information in the Bibliography Database - - - Choose Tools - Bibliography Database - - - Choose Insert - Record. - - - Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name - box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes. - - - Close the - Bibliography Database window. - - - To Store Bibliographic Information in an Individual Document - - - Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. - - - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. - - - Select From document content and click New. - - - Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name - box. - - - Select the publication source for the record in the Type - box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes. - - - Click OK. - - - In the Insert Bibliography Entry - dialog, click Insert, and then Close. - - - - Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database - - - Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. - - - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. - - - - - Select From bibliography database. - - - Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the Short name - box. - - - Click Insert and then click Close. - - -
- Bibliography Database - - - - - - - - - Some external tools exist that can interact with %PRODUCTNAME. One example is called Bibus. -
- + + +Creating a Bibliography +A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document. + +Storing Bibliographic Information +$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document. + +To Store Information in the Bibliography Database + + + + Choose Tools - Bibliography Database + + + Choose Insert - Record. + + + Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes. + + + Close the Bibliography Database window. + + + +To Store Bibliographic Information in an Individual Document + + + + Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. + + + Select From document content and click New. + + + Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box. + + + Select the publication source for the record in the Type box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes. + + + Click OK. + + + In the Insert Bibliography Entry dialog, click Insert, and then Close. + + + + +Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database + + + + Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. + + + + + + Select From bibliography database. + + + Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the Short name box. + + + Click Insert and then click Close. + + + +
+Bibliography Database + + + + + + + + +Some external tools exist that can interact with %PRODUCTNAME. One example is called Bibus. +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp index 757a5bcb9d..cd48842be1 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> - - Creating a Table of Contents - /text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp - - - -tables of contents; creating and updating - updating; tables of contents + + Creating a Table of Contents + /text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp + + + + + + + tables of contents; creating and updating + updating; tables of contents + -Creating a Table of Contents - -
- The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents. - To Insert a Table of Contents - - - Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. - - - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, and then click the Index/Table tab. - - - Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. - - - Select any options that you want. - - - Click OK. - - - If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the Additional Styles - check box in the Create from area, and then click the Assign styles button next to the check box. In the Assign Styles dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the >> - or the << - button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. -
- To Update a Table of Contents - Do one of the following: - - - Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index/Table. - - - Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. - - - - - - - - - - - - - + +Creating a Table of Contents + +
+The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents. + +To Insert a Table of Contents + + + + Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, and then click the Index/Table tab. + + + Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. + + + Select any options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + +If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the Additional Styles check box in the Create from area, and then click the Assign styles button next to the check box. In the Assign Styles dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. +
+ +To Update a Table of Contents +Do one of the following: + + + + Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index/Table. + + + Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. + + + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp index 728aeb6ed9..9d8f0762d2 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> - - User-Defined Indexes - /text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp - - - -indexes; creating user-defined indexes - user-defined indexes + + User-Defined Indexes + /text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp + + + + + + + indexes; creating user-defined indexes + user-defined indexes -User-Defined Indexes - - You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want. - To Create a User-Defined Index - - - Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index. - - - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry. - - - Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index - box. - - - Type a name for the index in the Name - box and click OK. - - - Click - Insert to add the selected word(s) to the new index. - - - Click - Close. - - - To Insert a User-Defined Index - - - Click in the document where you want to insert the index. - - - Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. - - - On the Index/Table tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type - box. - - - - - Select any options that you want. - - - Click OK. - - - If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select Additional styles, and then click the (Assign styles) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the >> - or the << - button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. - - - - - - - - - - + + +User-Defined Indexes +You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want. + +To Create a User-Defined Index + + + + Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry. + + + Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index box. + + + Type a name for the index in the Name box and click OK. + + + Click Insert to add the selected word(s) to the new index. + + + Click Close. + + + +To Insert a User-Defined Index + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the index. + + + Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + + + On the Index/Table tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type box. + + + + + + Select any options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + +If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select Additional styles, and then click the (Assign styles) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp index 166b2520d3..0ef38009a5 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Combining Numbered Lists - /text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp - - - -numbering; combining - merging;numbered lists - joining;numbered lists - lists;combining numbered lists - paragraphs;numbering non-consecutive + + Combining Numbered Lists + /text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp + + + + + + + numbering; combining + merging;numbered lists + joining;numbered lists + lists;combining numbered lists + paragraphs;numbering non-consecutive -Combining Numbered Lists - - You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list. - To Combine Consecutive Numbered Lists - - - Select all of the paragraphs in the lists. - - - On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off - icon twice. - - - To Create a Numbered List From Non-consecutive Paragraphs: - - - Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character. - - - Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine. - - - On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off - icon twice. - - - - - - - - - - + + +Combining Numbered Lists +You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list. + +To Combine Consecutive Numbered Lists + + + + Select all of the paragraphs in the lists. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off icon twice. + + + +To Create a Numbered List From Non-consecutive Paragraphs: + + + + Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character. + + + Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Numbering On/Off icon twice. + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp index c6749520f3..cf7bd0997d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Defining Number Ranges - /text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp - - - -numbering;quotations/similar items -MW deleted "number ranges;" and changed "numbering;" -Defining Number Ranges - - You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document. - - - Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ". - - - Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields, and then click the Variables - tab. - - - - - Click "Number range" in the Type - list. - - - Type "Quotation" in the Name - box. - - - Do one of the following: - - + + Defining Number Ranges + /text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp + + + - - -Type a number in the Value box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering. - - -Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the Level box. - + + numbering;quotations/similar items + +MW deleted "number ranges;" and changed "numbering;" + +Defining Number Ranges +You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document. + + + + Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ". + + + Choose Insert - Fields - More Fields, and then click the Variables tab. + + + + Click "Number range" in the Type list. + + + Type "Quotation" in the Name box. + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Type a number in the Value box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering. + + + Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the Level box. + + + + Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + + + + + + + + - - - Click Insert, and then click Close. - - - - - - - - - - - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp index 275a6dfdee..b2b5505d70 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Adding Line Numbers - /text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp - - - -line numbers - text; line numbers - paragraphs;line numbers - lines of text; numbering - numbering; lines - numbers; line numbering - marginal numbers on text pages -MW added "paragraphs;" -Adding Line Numbers - - $[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers. - Line numbers are not available in HTML format. - To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document - - - Choose Tools - Line Numbering. - - - Select Show numbering, and then select the options that you want. - - - Click OK. - - - To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs - - - Choose Tools - Line Numbering. - - - Select Show numbering. - - - Press Command+TF11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. - - - Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify. - All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style. - - - - - Click the Numbering tab. - - - In the Line Numbering - area, clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering - check box. - - - Click OK. - - - Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers. - - - Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Numbering - tab. - - - Select Include this paragraph in line numbering. - - - Click OK. - - - You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to. - To Specify the Starting Line Number - - - Click in a paragraph. - - - Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Numbering - tab. - - - Select the Include this paragraph in line numbering - check box. - - - Select Restart at the paragraph - check box. - - - Enter a line number in the Start with - box. - - - Click OK. - - - - Tools - Line Numbering - - Format - Paragraph - Numbering - Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles - + + Adding Line Numbers + /text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp + + + + + + + line numbers + text; line numbers + paragraphs;line numbers + lines of text; numbering + numbering; lines + numbers; line numbering + marginal numbers on text pages + +MW added "paragraphs;" + +Adding Line Numbers +$[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers. +Line numbers are not available in HTML format. + +To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document + + + + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + + Select Show numbering, and then select the options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + +To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs + + + + Choose Tools - Line Numbering. + + + Select Show numbering. + + + Press Command+T +F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + + Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify. + All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style. + + + + + + Click the Numbering tab. + + + In the Line Numbering area, clear the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. + + + Click OK. + + + Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Numbering tab. + + + Select Include this paragraph in line numbering. + + + Click OK. + + +You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to. + +To Specify the Starting Line Number + + + + Click in a paragraph. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Numbering tab. + + + Select the Include this paragraph in line numbering check box. + + + Select Restart at the paragraph check box. + + + Enter a line number in the Start with box. + + + Click OK. + + + +Tools - Line Numbering + +Format - Paragraph - Numbering +Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp index 6230cb70be..5fab00588d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Changing Page Backgrounds - /text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp - - - -page styles;backgrounds - backgrounds; different pages - changing;page backgrounds - pages;backgrounds -MW deleted "page backgrounds" -Changing Page Background - - $[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages. -
- To Change the Page Background - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - - Click the Page Styles icon. - - - In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. - - - On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. - - - In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. - - + + Changing Page Backgrounds + /text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp + + + - - -To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default". - - -To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style. - - + + page styles;backgrounds + backgrounds; different pages + changing;page backgrounds + pages;backgrounds + +MW deleted "page backgrounds" +Changing Page Background +$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages. +
- - - Click the Background tab. - - - In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. - - - Click OK. - - -
- To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document - Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - - Click the Page Styles icon. - - - Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply. - - - To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document - Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. - - - Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background. - - - Choose Insert - Manual Break. - - - Select Page break. - - - In the Style - box, select a page style that uses the page background. - - +To Change the Page Background + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + + On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. + + + In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. + + - -To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default". - - -To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style. -If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. - + + To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default". + + + To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style. + + + + + Click the Background tab. + + + In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. + + + Click OK. + + +
+ +To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply. + +To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + + + Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background. + + + Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + + Select Page break. + + + In the Style box, select a page style that uses the page background. + + + + + To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default". + + + To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style. + If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. + + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + + - - - Click OK. - - - - - - - - - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp index c3aab03ad0..31101c75db 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Creating and Applying Page Styles - /text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp - - - -page styles;creating and applying - defining;page styles - styles;for pages -MW deleted "applying;" and added "styles;" -Creating and Applying Page Styles - - $[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page. - - - - - - - To Define a New Page Style - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - - - Click the Page Styles icon. - - - In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. - - - On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. - - - Do one of the following: - - + + Creating and Applying Page Styles + /text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp + + + + + + + page styles;creating and applying + defining;page styles + styles;for pages + +MW deleted "applying;" and added "styles;" +Creating and Applying Page Styles +$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page. + + + +To Define a New Page Style + + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + + On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. + + + Do one of the following: + + - -To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the Next Style box. - - -To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the Next Style box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style. - + + To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the Next Style box. + + + To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the Next Style box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style. + + + + + Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. + +To Apply a Page Style + + + + Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to. + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Style icon. + + + Double-click a name in the list. + + +To Apply a Page Style to a New Page + + + + Click in the document where you want a new page to start. + + + Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + + Select Page break. + + + In the Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break. + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + + + + - - - Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. - - - To Apply a Page Style - - - Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to. - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the - Page Style icon. - - - Double-click a name in the list. - - - To Apply a Page Style to a New Page - - - Click in the document where you want a new page to start. - - - Choose Insert - Manual Break. - - - Select Page break. - - - In the Style - box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break. - - - Click OK. - - - - - - - - - - - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp index 0b422f77ec..9b20d9c784 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Selecting printer paper trays - /text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp - - - -selecting;paper trays - paper tray selection -mw made "paper trays;..." a one level entry -Selecting Printer Paper Trays - - Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document. - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - - Click the Page Styles - icon. - - - Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose Modify. - - - In the Paper tray - box, select the paper tray that you want to use. - - - Click OK. - - - Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for. - - - Apply the page style to the pages that you want. - - - - - Creating and applying page styles - + + Selecting printer paper trays + /text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp + + + + + + + selecting;paper trays + paper tray selection + +mw made "paper trays;..." a one level entry + +Selecting Printer Paper Trays +Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document. + + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the Page Styles icon. + + + Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose Modify. + + + In the Paper tray box, select the paper tray that you want to use. + + + Click OK. + + + Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for. + + + Apply the page style to the pages that you want. + + + + +Creating and applying page styles + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp index 43f403c576..612e99a6c4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Inserting Cross-References - /text/swriter/guide/references.xhp - - - -references; inserting cross-references - cross-references; inserting and updating - tables; cross-referencing - pictures; cross-referencing - objects; cross-referencing - OLE objects;cross-referencing - draw objects;cross-referencing - updating;cross-references - inserting;cross-references + + Inserting Cross-References + /text/swriter/guide/references.xhp + + + + + + + references; inserting cross-references + cross-references; inserting and updating + tables; cross-referencing + pictures; cross-referencing + objects; cross-referencing + OLE objects;cross-referencing + draw objects;cross-referencing + updating;cross-references + inserting;cross-references -Inserting Cross-References - - Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-reference consists of a target and a reference that are inserted as fields in the document. - Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets. - Cross-Referencing Text - Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text. - To Insert a Target - - - Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference. - - - Choose Insert - Cross-reference. - - - In the Type list, select “Set Reference”. - - - Type a name for the target in the Name box. The selected text is displayed in the Value box. - - - Click Insert. The name of the target is added to the Selection - list. - - - Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section. - To Create a Cross-Reference to a Target - - - Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference. - - - Choose Insert - Cross-reference to open the dialog, if it is not open already. - - - In the Type list, select "Insert Reference". - - - In the Selection list, select the target that you want to cross-reference. - - - In the Insert reference to list, select the format for the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. - - - Click Insert. - - - Click Close when finished. - - - Cross-Referencing an Object - You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. - - - Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference. - - - Choose Insert - Cross-reference. - - - In the Type list, select the caption category of the object. - - - In the Selection list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference. - - - In the Insert reference to list, select the format of the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object. - - - Click Insert. - - - Click Close when finished. - - - Updating Cross-References - To manually update the cross-references in a document, choose Tools - Update - Fields from the menu or press F9. - Choose View - Fields to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents. - - - - - - + + +Inserting Cross-References +Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-reference consists of a target and a reference that are inserted as fields in the document. +Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets. + +Cross-Referencing Text +Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text. + +To Insert a Target + + + + Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + + + In the Type list, select “Set Reference”. + + + Type a name for the target in the Name box. The selected text is displayed in the Value box. + + + Click Insert. The name of the target is added to the Selection list. + + +Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section. + +To Create a Cross-Reference to a Target + + + + Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference to open the dialog, if it is not open already. + + + In the Type list, select "Insert Reference". + + + In the Selection list, select the target that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Insert reference to list, select the format for the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted. + + + Click Insert. + + + Click Close when finished. + + + +Cross-Referencing an Object +You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. + + + + Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference. + + + Choose Insert - Cross-reference. + + + In the Type list, select the caption category of the object. + + + In the Selection list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference. + + + In the Insert reference to list, select the format of the cross-reference. The format specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object. + + + Click Insert. + + + Click Close when finished. + + + +Updating Cross-References +To manually update the cross-references in a document, choose Tools - Update - Fields from the menu or press F9. +Choose View - Fields to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp index 0249ed3aac..162a328fec 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Modifying Cross-References - /text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp - - - -references; modifying cross-references - cross-references; modifying - editing;cross-references - searching;cross-references + + Modifying Cross-References + /text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp + + + + + + + references; modifying cross-references + cross-references; modifying + editing;cross-references + searching;cross-references -Modifying Cross-References - - - - Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify. - If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose View - Field Shadings or press Ctrl+F8. - - - Choose Edit - Fields. - - - Set the options that you want, and then click OK. - - - Use the arrow buttons in the Edit Fields - dialog to browse through the cross-references in the current document. - - - - + + +Modifying Cross-References + + + + Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify. + If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose View - Field Shadings or press Ctrl+F8. + + + Choose Edit - Fields. + + + Set the options that you want, and then click OK. + + +Use the arrow buttons in the Edit Fields dialog to browse through the cross-references in the current document. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp index f69eb61bd0..57e9bca3a4 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Inserting Sections - /text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp - - - -sections; inserting - inserting; sections - HTML documents;inserting linked sections - updating;linked sections, manually - links;inserting sections + + Inserting Sections + /text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp + + + + + + + sections; inserting + inserting; sections + HTML documents;inserting linked sections + updating;linked sections, manually + links;inserting sections -Inserting Sections - - You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document. - To Insert a New Section - - - Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section. - If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph. - - - Choose Insert - Section. - - - In the New Section - box, type a name for the section. - - - Set the options for the section, and then click Insert. - - - To Insert a Section as a Link - Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document. - When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose Tools - Update - Links. - You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved. - - - Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section. - - - Choose Insert - Section. - - - In the New Section - box, type a name for the section. - - - In the Link - area, select the Link - check box. Under Windows, you can also select the DDE check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. + + +Inserting Sections +You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document. + +To Insert a New Section + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section. + If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the New Section box, type a name for the section. + + + Set the options for the section, and then click Insert. + + + +To Insert a Section as a Link +Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document. +When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose Tools - Update - Links. +You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved. + + + + Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section. + + + Choose Insert - Section. + + + In the New Section box, type a name for the section. + + + In the Link area, select the Link check box. Under Windows, you can also select the DDE check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. - - - Click the browse button (...) next to the File name - box. - - - Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click Insert. - - - In the Section - box, select the section that you want to insert. - - - Click Insert. - - - - - - + + + Click the browse button (...) next to the File name box. + + + Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click Insert. + + + In the Section box, select the section that you want to insert. + + + Click Insert. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp index a4385389d5..ddba944b19 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Saving Text Documents in HTML Format - /text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp - - - -text documents; publishing in HTML - HTML documents; creating from text documents - homepage creation - saving;in HTML format + + Saving Text Documents in HTML Format + /text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp + + + + + + + text documents; publishing in HTML + HTML documents; creating from text documents + homepage creation + saving;in HTML format -Saving Text Documents in HTML Format - - You can save a $[officename] Writer document in HTML format, so that you can view it in a web browser. If you want, you can associate a page break with a specific heading paragraph style to generate a separate HTML page each time the style appears in the document. $[officename] Writer automatically creates a page containing hyperlinks to each of these pages. - When you save a text document in HTML format, any graphics in the document are saved into the HTML document as embedded data streams. $[officename] tries to keep the original format of graphics, i.e. JPEG pictures or SVG images will be saved into HTML as such. All other graphic formats are saved as PNG. - - - Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page. - - - Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document. - - - In the Styles - box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page. - - - Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click Save. - - - + + +Saving Text Documents in HTML Format +You can save a $[officename] Writer document in HTML format, so that you can view it in a web browser. If you want, you can associate a page break with a specific heading paragraph style to generate a separate HTML page each time the style appears in the document. $[officename] Writer automatically creates a page containing hyperlinks to each of these pages. +When you save a text document in HTML format, any graphics in the document are saved into the HTML document as embedded data streams. $[officename] tries to keep the original format of graphics, i.e. JPEG pictures or SVG images will be saved into HTML as such. All other graphic formats are saved as PNG. + + + + Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page. + + + Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document. + + + In the Styles box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page. + + + Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click Save. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp index 4cc31c9090..ee8f78feb6 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> - - Checking Spelling and Grammar - /text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp - - - -spellcheck; checking text documents manually - checking spelling;manually - grammar checker -mw added "grammar checker" -Checking Spelling and Grammar - - You can manually check the spelling and grammar of a text selection or the entire document. - To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. For many languages three different dictionaries exist: a spellchecker, a hyphenation dictionary, and a thesaurus. Each dictionary covers one language only. Grammar checkers can be downloaded and installed as extensions. See the extensions web page. - The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection. - - - Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check. - - - Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar. - - - When a possible spelling error is encountered, the Spellcheck - dialog opens and $[officename] offers some suggested corrections. - - - Do one of the following: - To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click Correct. - Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click Correct. - To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click Add to Dictionary. - - -
- -removed a line - Spelling and Grammar dialog - - -
- - + + Checking Spelling and Grammar + /text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp + + + + + + + spellcheck; checking text documents manually + checking spelling;manually + grammar checker + +mw added "grammar checker" + +Checking Spelling and Grammar +You can manually check the spelling and grammar of a text selection or the entire document. +To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. For many languages three different dictionaries exist: a spellchecker, a hyphenation dictionary, and a thesaurus. Each dictionary covers one language only. Grammar checkers can be downloaded and installed as extensions. See the extensions web page. +The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection. + + + + Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check. + + + Choose Tools - Spelling and Grammar. + + + When a possible spelling error is encountered, the Spellcheck dialog opens and $[officename] offers some suggested corrections. + + + Do one of the following: + To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click Correct. + Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click Correct. + To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click Add to Dictionary. + + + +
+removed a line +Spelling and Grammar dialog + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp index a0abbedf31..7d30c8db06 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Creating New Styles From Selections - /text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp - - - -styles; creating from selections - drag and drop;creating new styles - copying;styles, from selections -mw deleted "creating;" and added "copying;" -Creating New Styles From Selections - - To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - - Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. - - - Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to. - - - Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and choose New Style from Selection - from the submenu - - - Type a name in the Style Name - box. - - - Click OK. - - - To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop - - - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - - Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. - - - Select at least one character, or object, in the style that you want to copy. For page and frame styles, select at least one character or object in the page or frame. - - - Drag the character or object to the Styles and Formatting window and release. - For paragraph and character styles, you can drag-and-drop onto the respective icon in the Styles and Formatting window. You do not need to open that style category in advance. - - - You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the Styles and Formatting window and drop the frame onto the Frame Styles icon. -
- - - - Styles and Formatting -
- + + Creating New Styles From Selections + /text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp + + + + + + + styles; creating from selections + drag and drop;creating new styles + copying;styles, from selections + +mw deleted "creating;" and added "copying;" + +Creating New Styles From Selections + +To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection + + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. + + + Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to. + + + Click the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and choose New Style from Selection from the submenu + + + Type a name in the Style Name box. + + + Click OK. + + + +To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop + + + + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + Click the icon of the style category that you want to create. + + + Select at least one character, or object, in the style that you want to copy. For page and frame styles, select at least one character or object in the page or frame. + + + Drag the character or object to the Styles and Formatting window and release. + For paragraph and character styles, you can drag-and-drop onto the respective icon in the Styles and Formatting window. You do not need to open that style category in advance. + + +You can also drag-and-drop a frame into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new frame style: Click the frame, wait a moment with the mouse button pressed down, but without moving the mouse, then drag to the Styles and Formatting window and drop the frame onto the Frame Styles icon. + +
+ + + +Styles and Formatting +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp index de5e782961..7818ce526c 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Repeating a Table Header on a New Page - /text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp - - - -tables; heading repetition after page breaks - repeating; table headings after page breaks - headings; repeating in tables - multi-page tables -MW made "table heading repetition..." a two level entry and changed "headers;" to "headings:"mw added "multi-page tables" - - Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page - - You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans. - - - Choose Table - Insert - Table. - - - Select the Heading - and the Repeat heading - check boxes. - - - Select the number of rows and columns for the table. - - - Click OK. - - - - - - + + Repeating a Table Header on a New Page + /text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp + + + + + + + tables; heading repetition after page breaks + repeating; table headings after page breaks + headings; repeating in tables + multi-page tables + +MW made "table heading repetition..." a two level entry and changed "headers;" to "headings:"mw added "multi-page tables" + + +Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page +You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans. + + + + Choose Table - Insert - Table. + + + Select the Heading and the Repeat heading check boxes. + + + Select the number of rows and columns for the table. + + + Click OK. + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp index e0fb7d0533..412323b21f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Creating a Document Template - /text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp - - - -document templates - templates; creating document templates + + Creating a Document Template + /text/swriter/guide/template_create.xhp + + + + + + + document templates + templates; creating document templates -Creating a Document Template - - You can create a template to use as the basis for creating new text documents. - - - Create a document and add the content and formatting styles that you want. - - - Choose File - Save As Template. - - - In the New Template - box, type a name for the new template. - - - Select a template category in the Categories - list. - - - Click OK. - - - To create a document based on the template, choose - File - New - Templates, select the template, and then click - Open. -
- - - - File - Save As Template -
- - + + +Creating a Document Template +You can create a template to use as the basis for creating new text documents. + + + + Create a document and add the content and formatting styles that you want. + + + Choose File - Save As Template. + + + In the New Template box, type a name for the new template. + + + Select a template category in the Categories list. + + + Click OK. + + +To create a document based on the template, choose File - New - Templates, select the template, and then click Open. + +
+ + + +File - Save As Template +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp index ddf371599e..84dc222a9f 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Animating Text - /text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp - - - -text animation - effects; text animation - animations;text -mw made "animating text" a two level entry -Animating Text - - You can only animate text that is contained in a drawing object, such as rectangles, lines, or text objects. For example, draw a rectangle, then double-click the rectangle and enter your text. - - - Select the drawing object containing the text that you want to animate. - - - Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes, and then click the - Text Animation tab. - - - In the Effect - box, select the animation that you want. - - - Set the properties of the effect, and then click OK. - - - + + Animating Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp + + + + + + + text animation + effects; text animation + animations;text + +mw made "animating text" a two level entry + +Animating Text +You can only animate text that is contained in a drawing object, such as rectangles, lines, or text objects. For example, draw a rectangle, then double-click the rectangle and enter your text. + + + + Select the drawing object containing the text that you want to animate. + + + Choose Format - Object - Text Attributes, and then click the Text Animation tab. + + + In the Effect box, select the animation that you want. + + + Set the properties of the effect, and then click OK. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp index 75bbea1576..41ec84f28d 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page - /text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp - - - -text frames; centering on pages - centering;text frames on pages - title pages; centering text on + + Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page + /text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp + + + + + + + text frames; centering on pages + centering;text frames on pages + title pages; centering text on -Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page - - - - Select the text that you want to center on the page. - - - Choose Insert - Frame. - - - In the Anchor - area, select To page. - - - In the Size - area, set the dimensions of the frame. - - - In the Position - area, select "Center" in the Horizontal - and Vertical - boxes. - - - Click OK. - - - To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose Format - Frame/Object. Click the Borders tab, and then click in the - Set No Border box in the - Line Arrangement area. - To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame. - - - - + + +Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page + + + + Select the text that you want to center on the page. + + + Choose Insert - Frame. + + + In the Anchor area, select To page. + + + In the Size area, set the dimensions of the frame. + + + In the Position area, select "Center" in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes. + + + Click OK. + + +To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose Format - Frame/Object. Click the Borders tab, and then click in the Set No Border box in the Line Arrangement area. +To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame. + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp index 45ef5bfdcc..9da6f39ca7 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - - +--> + - - Rotating Text - /text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp - - - -text; rotating - rotating;text + + Rotating Text + /text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp + + + + + + + text; rotating + rotating;text -Rotating Text - - You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object. - - - Choose View - Toolbars- Drawing to open the Drawing - toolbar. - - - Select the Text icon -Icon - . - - - Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text. - - - Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the Rotate icon -Icon - on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. - - - Drag one of the corner handles of the text object. - - - You can also right-click the text object, choose Position and Size, click the Rotation tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object. -
- - Show Draw Functions -
- + + +Rotating Text +You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object. + + + + Choose View - Toolbars- Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar. + + + Select the Text icon Icon. + + + Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text. + + + Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the Rotate icon Icon on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. + + + Drag one of the corner handles of the text object. + + +You can also right-click the text object, choose Position and Size, click the Rotation tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object. + +
+ +Show Draw Functions +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp index e2eeabc997..171a383e77 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> - - Adding Bullets - /text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp - - - -bullet lists;turning on and off - paragraphs; bulleted - bullets;adding and editing - formatting;bullets - removing;bullets in text documents - changing;bulleting symbols -mw deleted "editing;" and "adding;" -Adding Bullets - - To Add Bullets - - - Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to. - - - On the Formatting Bar, click the Bullets On/Off icon -Icon - . - - - To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the Bullets On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. - To Format Bullets - To change the formatting of a bulleted list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. - For example, to change the bulleting symbol, click the Options tab, click the Select button next to Character, and then select a special character. You can also click the Image tab, and then click a symbol style in the Selection - area. -
- - - - - - - -
- + + Adding Bullets + /text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp + + + + + + + bullet lists;turning on and off + paragraphs; bulleted + bullets;adding and editing + formatting;bullets + removing;bullets in text documents + changing;bulleting symbols + +mw deleted "editing;" and "adding;" + +Adding Bullets + +To Add Bullets + + + + Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to. + + + On the Formatting Bar, click the Bullets On/Off icon Icon. + + +To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the Bullets On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. + +To Format Bullets +To change the formatting of a bulleted list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. +For example, to change the bulleting symbol, click the Options tab, click the Select button next to Character, and then select a special character. You can also click the Image tab, and then click a symbol style in the Selection area. + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp index 2b3374c710..0c25534192 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp @@ -36,8 +36,7 @@ You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style. To Apply Numbering Manually - To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the Numbering On/Off - icon on the Formatting Bar. + To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Formatting Bar. You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Styles and Formatting window. @@ -47,10 +46,10 @@ To change the hierarchical level of a bullet in a list, click in front of the paragraph, then press the Tab key. - To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. - To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. + To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a new format. To apply the same bullet or numbering format to all paragraphs in the list, select all paragraphs, choose Format - Bullets and Numbering, and then click a format. @@ -62,15 +61,13 @@ Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the numbering format of the style, all paragraphs using the style are automatically updated. - Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles - icon. + Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose Modify. - Click the Outline & Numbering - tab. + Click the Outline & Numbering tab. In the Numbering Style box, select the type of numbering that you want to use. diff --git a/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp index c3c250be18..d6bfee85be 100644 --- a/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp +++ b/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - - +--> - - Wrapping Text Around Objects - /text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp - - - -text wrap around objects - contour editor - contour wrap - text; formatting around objects - formatting; contour wrap - objects; contour wrap - wrapping text;editing contours - editors;contour editor + + Wrapping Text Around Objects + /text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp + + + + + + + text wrap around objects + contour editor + contour wrap + text; formatting around objects + formatting; contour wrap + objects; contour wrap + wrapping text;editing contours + editors;contour editor -Wrapping Text Around Objects - - To Wrap Text Around an Object - - - Select the object. - - - Choose Format - Frame and Objects - Properties, and then click the Wrap tab to choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. - The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet. - - - To Specify the Wrapping Properties - - - Select the object. - - - Choose Format - Image - Properties, and then click the Wrap tab. - - - - - Set the options that you want. - - - Click OK. - - - To Change the Wrapping Contour of a Graphic - You can change the shape that the text wraps around. - - - Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. - - - - - Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the Apply - icon (green check mark). - - - Close the Contour Editor - window. - - -
- - Contour Editor -
- + + +Wrapping Text Around Objects + +To Wrap Text Around an Object + + + + Select the object. + + + Choose Format - Frame and Objects - Properties, and then click the Wrap tab to choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. + The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet. + + + +To Specify the Wrapping Properties + + + + Select the object. + + + Choose Format - Image - Properties, and then click the Wrap tab. + + + + + + Set the options that you want. + + + Click OK. + + + +To Change the Wrapping Contour of a Graphic +You can change the shape that the text wraps around. + + + + Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. + + + + + + Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the Apply icon (green check mark). + + + Close the Contour Editor window. + + + +
+ +Contour Editor +
+ + \ No newline at end of file -- cgit